VIPEDIA 12 V3.x User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 224

VIPEDIA-12

User’s Manual
ASL Document Ref.: U-0641-3283.docx
Issue: 01 complete, approved - Date: 13/11/18
Part Number: M0664_TBD
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Note:

Audinate® is a registered trademark of Audinate Pty Ltd.


Dante™ is a trademark of Audinate Pty Ltd.

Copyright © 2018 Application Solutions (Safety and Security) Limited

Application Solutions (Safety and Security) Limited


Unit 17 Cliffe Industrial Estate
Lewes - East Sussex
BN8 6JL - UK
Tel: +44(0)1273 405411 Fax: +44(0)1273 405415
www.asl-control.co.uk

All rights reserved.


Information contained in this document is believed to be accurate. However, no representation or warranty is given and Application
Solutions (Safety and Security) Limited assumes no liability with respect to the accuracy of such information.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 2 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Contents

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1 PA/VA System Overview ............................................................................................................ 9
1.2 PA/VA System Configuration Overview ................................................................................... 13
1.3 On-board Contact Inputs and Outputs (GPIO) ......................................................................... 16
1.3.1 Contact Input Ports ........................................................................................................... 16
1.3.2 Contact Output Ports ........................................................................................................ 20
2 Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................................................ 21
3 EN 54-16 Dynamic Configuration Check List .......................................................................................... 22
4 Front Panel Operation .............................................................................................................................. 24
4.1 Initialisation ............................................................................................................................... 24
4.2 LCD Menu Display .................................................................................................................... 25
4.2.1 Display Information ........................................................................................................... 25
4.2.2 Menu Selection Markers ................................................................................................... 27
4.2.3 Menu Navigation and Selection Controls.......................................................................... 27
4.2.4 Menu Timeouts ................................................................................................................. 27
4.3 LCD Backlight ........................................................................................................................... 27
4.4 Accessing the VIPEDIA-12 ....................................................................................................... 28
4.5 Logging On ............................................................................................................................... 28
4.6 Logging Off ............................................................................................................................... 28
4.7 Changing the Front Panel Access Code (PIN) ......................................................................... 29
4.8 VIPEDIA-12 Front Panel Configuration .................................................................................... 29
4.8.1 IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and MAC Address Configuration ................................... 29
4.8.2 Unit Identity Configuration ................................................................................................ 30
4.8.2.1 Configuring the Unit’s ID ......................................................................................... 30
4.8.2.2 Verifying the Unit’s Name ....................................................................................... 31
4.8.3 Configuring the Date and Time ......................................................................................... 31
4.8.4 Configuring the UTC Offset (for GPS time synchronization only) .................................... 31
4.8.5 Verifying the Software Version ......................................................................................... 32
4.8.6 Verifying Network Card IP Address (if fitted and configured) ........................................... 34
4.9 ASL Amplifier Frame Commissioning ....................................................................................... 34
4.9.1 Learning Connected V400 and X400 Amplifier Frames ................................................... 34
4.9.2 Viewing Configured Frames ............................................................................................. 37
4.9.2.1 Verbose View.......................................................................................................... 37
4.9.2.2 Terse View .............................................................................................................. 38
4.9.3 Configuring the Frame Temperature Alarm ...................................................................... 38
4.9.4 Commissioning an Amplifier Slot ...................................................................................... 39
4.9.4.1 Editing an Amplifier Slot Description ...................................................................... 39
4.9.4.2 Configuring the Amplifier Type (X400 only) ............................................................ 39
4.9.4.3 Configuring the Number of Outputs Driven by an Amplifier (X400 only) ................ 39
4.9.4.4 Commissioning an Amplifier’s Internal Audio Path AC Surveillance ...................... 42
4.9.4.5 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance............................................... 44
4.9.4.5.1 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using DC Surveillance
(V400 and X400) .......................................................................................... 45
4.9.4.5.2 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using AC Surveillance
(V400 and X400) .......................................................................................... 47
4.9.4.5.3 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using Impedance
Monitoring (X400 only) ................................................................................. 48
4.9.4.6 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Earth Leakage Monitoring (V400 and X400)
................................................................................................................................ 50
4.10 Fault Monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 51
4.10.1 Viewing the Active Fault List (Local Faults) ...................................................................... 53
4.10.2 Viewing the Summary of Faults on Remote Units ............................................................ 53
4.10.3 Accepting Faults ............................................................................................................... 54
4.10.4 Clearing Faults .................................................................................................................. 55
4.10.5 Router Fault Log ............................................................................................................... 55
4.10.6 V400 Frame Fault Log ...................................................................................................... 56

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 3 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.7 Viewing Fault Status of X400 Outputs .............................................................................. 57


4.10.8 Fault Codes and Suggested Actions ................................................................................ 58
4.10.8.1 VIPEDIA-12 Faults.................................................................................................. 58
4.10.8.2 VIPEDIA-NET Network Card Faults ....................................................................... 66
4.10.8.3 V400 and X400 Frame and Amplifier Faults .......................................................... 68
4.10.8.4 V2000 Frame and Amplifier Faults ......................................................................... 71
4.10.8.5 Analogue Input and Microphone Faults .................................................................. 76
4.10.8.6 BMB01 Remote I/O Unit and On-board GPIO Faults ............................................. 78
4.11 Testing Functions ..................................................................................................................... 79
4.11.1 Testing the Indicators and the Alarm Sounder ................................................................. 79
4.11.2 Monitoring an Audio Input or Output ................................................................................. 79
4.11.3 Audio Output ..................................................................................................................... 79
4.11.3.1 Monitoring an Analogue Output .............................................................................. 79
4.11.3.2 Monitoring a DSP to FPGA Output ......................................................................... 80
4.11.3.3 Monitoring a PMC Output ....................................................................................... 81
4.11.3.4 Monitoring an Amplifier Output ............................................................................... 81
4.11.4 Audio Input ........................................................................................................................ 81
4.11.4.1 Monitoring an Analogue Input................................................................................. 81
4.11.4.2 Monitoring a DVA Input .......................................................................................... 81
4.11.4.3 Monitoring a FPGA to DSP Input............................................................................ 82
4.11.4.3.1 Monitoring Audio on the DBB Bus ................................................................ 82
4.11.4.3.2 Monitoring Audio in a Dante™ Channel ....................................................... 91
4.11.4.4 Monitoring a PMC Input (Audio from the Network Card) ........................................ 92
5 VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool ................................................................................................ 94
5.1 Overview of the GUI Elements ................................................................................................. 95
5.1.1 Main GUI Elements ........................................................................................................... 95
5.1.2 Data Input Controls ........................................................................................................... 97
5.1.3 Password Protect Parameters and Functions .................................................................. 98
5.2 Starting and Closing the Application ........................................................................................ 99
5.3 Commissioning the Audio Settings ......................................................................................... 105
5.3.1 Commissioning an Audio Input ....................................................................................... 105
5.3.1.1 Adjusting the Input Level ...................................................................................... 107
5.3.1.2 Configuring the Input Sensitivity ........................................................................... 108
5.3.1.3 Trimming the Input ................................................................................................ 109
5.3.1.4 Configuring the Input Surveillance Tone .............................................................. 110
5.3.1.5 Enabling/Disabling the Input High Pass Filter ...................................................... 112
5.3.1.6 Configuring the Input Equaliser ............................................................................ 113
5.3.1.7 Configuring the Pre-Announcement Chime.......................................................... 115
5.3.1.8 Enabling/Disabling the Phantom Power ............................................................... 116
5.3.1.9 Configuring the Input Phase ................................................................................. 117
5.3.1.10 Configuring the Input Limiter ................................................................................ 118
5.3.1.11 Configuring the Input Compressor........................................................................ 120
5.3.1.12 Configuring the Input Noise Gate (e.g. for VOX Routing) .................................... 122
5.3.2 Adjusting a DVA Input Level ........................................................................................... 124
5.3.3 Commissioning an Audio Output .................................................................................... 125
5.3.3.1 Adjusting the Output Level ................................................................................... 126
5.3.3.2 Configuring the Output Surveillance Tone ........................................................... 127
5.3.3.3 Configuring the Output Delay ............................................................................... 131
5.3.3.4 Commissioning the Override Gain........................................................................ 133
5.3.3.5 Configuring the Night Time Volume Control Cap Level........................................ 134
5.3.3.6 Configuring the Output Equaliser ......................................................................... 136
5.3.3.7 Configuring the Output Relative Gains ................................................................. 138
5.3.3.8 Configuring the Anti-Feedback Cap Level ............................................................ 139
5.3.3.9 Configuring the Output Limiter.............................................................................. 140
5.3.3.10 Configuring the Hard Clipper ................................................................................ 142
5.3.4 Committing the Live Settings .......................................................................................... 144
5.3.5 Rolling Back to the Last Committed Audio Settings ....................................................... 145
5.4 Accepting and Clearing Faults................................................................................................ 146
5.5 Extracting and Injecting Audio Settings to/from a File ............................................................ 147
5.6 Loading DVA Messages ......................................................................................................... 150

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 4 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6 Maintenance........................................................................................................................................... 158
6.1 Routine Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 158
6.1.1 Daily Attention ................................................................................................................. 158
6.1.2 Weekly Attention ............................................................................................................. 158
6.1.3 Monthly Attention ............................................................................................................ 158
6.1.4 Quarterly Inspection and Test ......................................................................................... 158
6.1.5 Annual Inspection and Test ............................................................................................ 159
6.2 Non-Routine Maintenance Tasks ........................................................................................... 159
6.2.1 Build Standard and Software Versions ........................................................................... 159
6.2.2 Serial Number Label and Build Standard Version .......................................................... 159
6.2.3 Software/Firmware Version ............................................................................................ 159
6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET Firmware/Software .................................. 160
6.2.5 Loading DVA Messages Using a Serial Connection ...................................................... 161
6.2.6 Resetting the Front Panel Access Code (PIN) to Factory Default .................................. 166
6.2.7 Resetting the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic and or Static Configuration to Factory Default ...... 166
6.2.7.1 Resetting the Dynamic and/or Static Configuration to Factory Default from the
Front Panel ........................................................................................................... 166
6.2.7.2 Resetting the Dynamic and/or Static Configuration to Factory Default Using the DIP
Switches on the Router Board .............................................................................. 167
6.2.8 Replacing the Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery on VIPEDIA-12...................................... 169
6.2.9 Replacing a VIPEDIA-12 Unit ......................................................................................... 170
6.2.10 Packing for Return for Repair ......................................................................................... 172
7 Acronyms ............................................................................................................................................... 173
8 Reference Documentation ..................................................................................................................... 175
APPENDIX A – PC Requirements ................................................................................................................. 176
APPENDIX B – Installing the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) ............................................. 181
APPENDIX C – Installing the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT) ........................................................................ 185
APPENDIX D – Installing the VIPA Config Tool (VCT) ................................................................................. 189
APPENDIX E – Installing and Launching the Update Manager Tool ............................................................ 193
APPENDIX F – Installing and Launching the Network Card Manager Tool .................................................. 196
APPENDIX G – Launching the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) .......................................... 197
APPENDIX H – Launching the ASL Transfer Tool (from the PAVA SCT) .................................................... 199
APPENDIX I – Launching the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT) ....................................................................... 203
APPENDIX J – Launching the VIPA Config Tool (VCT) and Loading a Configuration File .......................... 204
APPENDIX K – Launching the V2000 Dynamic Configuration Tool (V2000 DCT) ....................................... 206
APPENDIX L – Connecting to a VIPEDIA-12 Using Serial ........................................................................... 210
APPENDIX M – Connecting to a Network Card Using Serial........................................................................ 212
APPENDIX N – Connecting to a Network Card Using SSH .......................................................................... 214
APPENDIX O – VIPEDIA-12 IP Address and Unit ID when Unknown .......................................................... 216
APPENDIX P – Finding the Network Card IP Address and Hostname when Unknown ............................... 217
APPENDIX Q – Resetting a VIPEDIA-12 or a Network Card using the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT) ....... 219

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 5 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 6 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Safety and Precaution

Observe all safety information both on the equipment and in this section.

ESD Precaution

The product contains static-sensitive devices. Observe ESD precautions when handling the
product with the lid removed.

Electrical Safety

Ensure power supply cabling is adequately rated for the unit’s operating current and protected, in
case of short circuit, by a correctly rated fuse or circuit breaker. This is particularly important for
supply feeds from the 24 V backup batteries which can deliver short circuit currents of several
hundred amps.

Always replace blown fuses with the correct type and rating.

External 24 V DC batteries connected to this unit can deliver very high currents that could cause
fire or burns.
Take care to avoid short-circuits of the battery supply by tools or jewellery.
Do not allow tools or unconnected cables to rest on top of batteries.

Fire / Burn Safety

Batteries contained within the rack can deliver very high currents that could cause fire or burns.
Take care to avoid short-circuits of the battery terminals by tools or jewellery.
Do not allow tools or unconnected cables to rest on top of batteries.

Laser

This is equipment is a Class 1 Laser/LED product with Network Card (with fibre optic modules)
fitted.
Don't stare at the Laser/LED beam.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 7 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 8 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

1 Introduction

This User’s Manual provides general guidance for the operation, commissioning, maintenance, and fault
finding of the VIPEDIA-12 Audio Router.
Note that this document does not provide information on how to create the system configuration; see Section
“1.2 PA/VA System Configuration Overview” (page 13) for configuration overview and associated
documentation.

1.1 PA/VA System Overview


A VIPEDIA-12 PA/VA system is comprised of ASL VIPEDIA-12 Audio Routers, INTEGRA units, Amplifier
Frames (V400, X400 and/or V2000) and peripherals (such as MPS/EMS microphones and BMB01 Remote
I/O Units).
A VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA unit allows connection of 12 audio inputs, which can be routed to any output on a
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA unit in the system.
Each VIPEDIA-12 can monitor and control ASL Amplifier Frames (V400 and/or X400), the associated
amplifiers and interface card/surveillance units. Each frame connects to the VIPEDIA-12 via an Audio-CAN
serial data network and audio monitor bus. A VIPEDIA-12 can also monitor and control ASL V2000 Amplifier
Frames via Ethernet.
The VIPEDIA-12 includes the following elements; see diagram in Figure 1 (page 11):
• 12 x universal microphone inputs, each of which supports a serial interface to enable the connection of
an ASL microphone.
Fire or Emergency Microphones can be connected to Inputs 1 and 2. These act as All-Call failsafe
override microphones in the event of processor failure.
Any of the serial interfaces can be used for connection to either a host device (or application) using ASL
VAR Host Control Protocol or a GPS time synchronisation device.
Any of the microphone inputs is configurable for Miscellaneous Input operation. When configured for this
mode of operation, the serial communication interface is disabled, and other type of audio input can be
connected, e.g. PC/DVA audio, Long Line PA (LLPA) audio, or background music input. The audio may
be routed by a contact, microphone button or permanent route.
The Miscellaneous Input when used in conjunction with the input Noise Gate function can be used to
control routes known as VOX routes. A trigger event occurs when the Noise Gate opens (due to audio
input rising above the specified threshold), whilst a clear event occurs when the Gate closes (due to
audio input signal dropping below the specified threshold). VOX route will normally be used to auto-route
the same audio source as the trigger, but this is not compulsory, and it can be used to route any audio
source.
Any of the microphone inputs can be used for connection of an ASL DANS Dynamic Ambient Noise
Sensor. When configured for this mode of operation, the serial communication interface is disabled.
• 1 x Mute Input which can be used to silence any active routes.
• 12 x A&B audio outputs.
• Built-in GPIO (General Purpose Input/Outputs): 12 x inputs (configurable as analogue or digital),
12 x digital outputs and two relay outputs. These can be used for fire panel interfaces, fault input and
output information or to select other functions within the VIPEDIA-12 (such as ANS Ambient Noise
Sensor, VC Volume Control and PS Programme Selector).
• 2 x relay outputs
Relay 1 indicates the fault state of the PA/VA system if the unit is a Fault Master. If the unit is not a Fault
Master, Relay 1 indicates the fault state of the unit itself, i.e. the local fault state.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 9 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Relay 2 indicates the VA state of the PA/VA system or controls the power supply to Active Standby
Redundant System via the RCB01 Changeover Relay Box.
Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration Guide (U-0641-3090) for further information on
Active Standby Redundant System.
• RS485 port for connection of up to 9 x ASL BMB01 Remote I/O Units. Each BMB01 unit provides
additional GPIO capability.
• Digital storage for up to 64 x digital messages with total message duration of up to 10 minutes.
The messages can be routed flexibly under the control of a GPIO, an ASL microphone button or a
permanent route.
• VIPEDIA-NET Network Card (factory fit optional item): The Network Card supports ASL VIPA software
suite applications such as VIPA DVA storage and playback, IP microphones, SIP interface, and third-
party integration using ASL VIPA SIL and VIPA SDK, and is required where the VIPEDIA-12 unit
transmits and/or receives audio over IP.
The built-in DBB (Digital BackBone) high speed digital audio bus and Ethernet ports allow up to four
VIPEDIA-12 units to be connected within a rack. Any of the inputs can be routed to any of the outputs in a
single larger routing matrix (24 x 24, 36 x 36 or 48 x 48). Each matrix comprises a DBB Group.
VIPEDIA-12 units in a DBB Group enter hardware bypass operation mode as result of a processor
failure/misoperation or DBB/Ethernet connection fault within the DBB.
DBB Groups can be connected via IP network to form a larger system where any input can be routed to any
output of the system. The audio between DBB Groups is broadcast over IP using ASL’s PMC format.
The VIPEDIA-12 is also available in the following formats:
• VIPEDIA-12-PRO
The VIPEDIA-12-PRO is a stand-alone VIPEDIA-12 that has Dante™ capability. The Dante™ module is
fitted to the VIPEDIA-NET Network Card.
Refer to the Dante Configuration Guide (ASL Vipedia-Dante-Config-Guide) for further information.
• VIPEDIA-12-TS
The VIPEDIA-12-TS is a stand-alone VIPEDIA-12 that is fitted with a Terminal Server Board which
provides conversion from TCP/IP to serial protocol.
Refer to the VIPEDIA-12-TS Installation Guide (U-0641-3067) for further information.
• INTEGRA
The INTEGRA is a self-contained wall-mount Voice Alarm solution comprised of a VIPEDIA-12, a V2000
and batteries; see overview in Figure 2 (page 12).
Refer to the INTEGRA Installation Guide (U-0732-0025) and INTEGRA User’s Manual (U-0732-0051) for
further information.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 10 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 1 VIPEDIA-12 block diagram

VIPEDIA-12

HARDWIRED PTT AND SPEAK NOW


MIC AUX2 PORT

HARDWIRED PTT AND SPEAK NOW


MIC AUX1 PORT

Ethernet
AUDIO AND
FIRE/EMERG DATA (RS485)
IP 1

...
MICROPHONE V200 0
AUDIO AND
FIRE/EMERG DATA (RS485)
IP 2
MICROPHONE

...
(AUDIO INP UT PORT 1 – 12)
AUDIO AND
...

HARDWARE ANALO GUE B YPAS S


DATA (RS485)

12 x MIC INP UTS


PAG ING

(AUDIO OUTPUT PO RT 1 – 12)

...
MICROPHONE V200 0

12 x O UTPUTS (A & B)
...

AUDIO OR/AND
MIS CE LLANEOUS
AUDIO AUDIO
ROUTING
...

OR/AND
MATRIX
AUDIO
DANS
...

V400 OR

...
DATA (RS485) X400
1 x SE RIAL DEVICE
(HOST or G PS)

...
MUTE

V400 OR

...
DVA STORAGE
X400
(DVA01 to DVA64)

CONTROL INTERFACES

12 x DIs GPIO
BMB01 RS485
12 x AIs
(up to 9)
12 x DOs
AUDIO-CAN
AMP CTRL PORT
CONTROL PORT
2 x Relay Outputs (up to 192 amplifiers)

CONTACTS IN
12 x DI/AIs
PORT

CONTACTS OUT
12 x DOs ETHERNE T PORTS
PORT

Acronyms:

AI: Analogue Input


BMB01: ASL Remote I/O Unit
CAN: Controller Area Network VIPEDIA-NET
DANS: ASL Dynamic Ambient Noise Sensor
DI: Digital Input
(optiona l item require d for PMC au dio)
DO: Digital Output
DVA: Digital Voice Announcer
VIPA Software VIPA DVA ETHERNET
GPIO: General Purpose Inputs/Outputs
GPS: Global Positioning System Suite Storage PORTS
PMC: ASL audio over IP format
V2000: ASL Amplifier Mainframe
V400: ASL Amplifier Mainframe
X400: ASL Amplifier Mainframe

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 11 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 2 INTEGRA overview

VIPEDIA-NET Network Card ①


Electronics Module – Top View

VIPEIDA-12 Router
V2000 Amplifier Frame
(LSZDC and V2000-STBY Interface Cards shown as example)

FRONT

PANEL
(rear view)
Optional Items:
ELECTRONICS
MODULE
① Network Card (factory fit)

② BMB01 Remote I/O Unit

③ Network Switch

BATTERIES

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 12 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

1.2 PA/VA System Configuration Overview


The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Audio Router and V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame configuration is comprised
of two parts: static system configuration and dynamic configuration.
• Static System Configuration (system configuration or PAVA SCT configuration):
This contains system and site-specific configuration that is unlikely to change frequently. It is generated
by the use of the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) and stored in a XML file.
One XML system configuration file is created for any given PA/VA system. A PA/VA system is comprised
of at least one ASL VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Audio Router (including VIPEDIA-NET Network Card),
Amplifier Frames (V400, X400 and or V2000) and peripherals (such as MPS/EMS microphones and
BMB01 Remote I/O Units).
The system configuration is loaded into all VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers, VIPEDIA-NET Network
Cards and V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frames by the use of the File Transfer Tool. The File Transfer
Tool can also read the XML system configuration from any VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router or
V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame in the system.
• Dynamic Configuration:
This contains site-specific configuration that is expected to change on a fairly routine basis, such as the
various audio settings and those parameters that would be adjusted during commissioning such as
system surveillance. The dynamic configuration includes the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router front panel
settings.
All audio settings and some of the dynamic settings are configured by the use of the Dynamic
Configuration Tools: the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool (VIPEDIA-12 DCT) and V2000
Dynamic Configuration (V2000 DCT). These tools also provide means to upload and download the
dynamic configuration from/to a file.
The VIPEDIA-NET Network Card configuration is generated and applied by the use of the VIPA Config Tool
(VCT) and the PAVA SCT..One VCT configuration file (CFG) is created for any given VIPA system which
may be comprised of any number of VIPEDIA-NET units and VIPA-base products such as the Linutop and
VIPA Server.
Figure 3 (page 15) illustrates the INTEGRA/VIPEDIA-12/V2000/VIPEDIA-NET configuration structure and
the associated tools.
• The VIPEDIA-12 User’s Manual (U-0641-3283) provides general guidance for the operation and
configuration from the unit’s front panel and by the use of the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool.
• The PAVA System Configuration Tool User’s Manual (U-0701-1583) provides general guidance for the
system configuration of a PA/VA system comprised of at least one ASL VIPEDIA-12 Audio Router,
Amplifier Frames (V400, X400 and or V2000) and peripherals (such as MPS/EMS microphones and
BMB01 Remote I/O Units).
• The V2000 User’s Manual (U-0623-1005) provides guidance for the operation, configuration and
commissioning of V2000 units.
• The INTEGRA User’s Guide (U-0732-0051) provides guidance for the operation, configuration,
commissioning and maintenance of INTEGRA units
• The VIPA Config Tool comes with help files which provide general guidance for the configuration and
commissioning of VIPA devices and the VIPEDIA-NET.
• The VIPA Microphone and Vipedia Contact Input Configuration Guide (U-0582-4379) provides guidance
for the configuration of microphones and contacts attached to a VIPEDIA-NET Network Card.
• The SIP Configuration Guide (U-0701-1497) provides guidance for the configuration of the SIP interface
on a VIPEDIA-NET Network Card.
• The Dante Configuration Guide (ASL Vipedia-Dante-Config-Guide) provides guidance for the
configuration of the Dante™ audio interface.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 13 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Notes:

a) The following short names will be used in this document:


• PAVA SCT = PAVA System Configuration Tool
• FTT = Firmware Transfer Tool
• VIPEDIA-12 DCT = VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool
• V2000 DCT = V2000 Dynamic Configuration Tool
• VCT = VIPA Config Tool
b) The File Transfer Tool, VIPEDIA-12 DCT and V2000 DCT are installed as part of the PAVA SCT and are
launched from the PAVA SCT.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 14 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 3 INTEGRA/VIPEDIA-12/VIPEDIA-NET/V2000 configuration structure, associated tools and user


documentation

DYNAMIC
CONFIGURATION
INTEGRA ⑤ (AUDIO AND XML file
SURVEILLANCE
SETTINGS)

V2000
JOUL MESSAGES V2000 DYNAMIC ④
DYNAMIC
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION TOOL
(V2000 DCT)

PAVA SYSTEM ②
BINARY
STATIC ④
CONFIGURATION XML CONFIGURATION TOOL
(PAVA SCT)

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION XML file

VIPEDIA-12 BINARY FILE TRANSFER


STATIC TOOL
CONFIGURATION XML

FRONT PANEL ①
JOUL MESSAGES
DYNAMIC DYNAMIC
CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION JOUL MESSAGES VIPEDIA-12 ①
DYNAMIC
CONFIGURATION TOOL
(VIPEDIA-12 DCT)
VIPEDIA-NET

STATIC
VIPEDIA-12 ①
CONFIGURATION XML (a) (b) AUDIO SETTINGS
MANAGER

CFG file
DYNAMIC
CONFIGURATION CVS file
(AUDIO
SETTINGS)

VIPA ③
CONFIG TOOL (VCT)

Notes:
(a) Device specific configuration, not the
VIPA SYSTEM AND system configuration.
CFG file VIPEDIA-NET (b) The File Transfer Tool does not support
CONFIGURATION the download of the XML configuration
from the Network Card.

User documentation:

① VIPEDIA-12 User’s Manual (ASL U-0641-3283)

② PAVA System Configuration Tool User's Manual (ASL U-0701-1583)

③ VIPA Config Tool (VCT) Help files / INTEGRA User’s Manual (U-0732-0051) / VIPA Microphone and Vipedia Contact Input
Configuration Guide (U-0582-4379)
④ V2000 User’s Manual (U-0623-1005)

⑤ INTEGRA User’s Manual (U-0732-0051)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 15 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

1.3 On-board Contact Inputs and Outputs (GPIO)


The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router has three contact input ports and two contact output ports.

Figure 4 On-board contact input and outputs

VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router

GPIO
+7 V +7 V +7 V

Enable/ Enable/ Enable/


Disable Disable Disable
(Group A) (Group B) (Group C)

4k7 ohms

4k7 ohms
DI/AI 01 4k7 ohms
CONTACTS IN
...

1-4
PORT
DI/AI 04

DI/AI 05
CONTACTS IN
...

5-8
PORT
DI/AI 08

DI/AI 09
CONTACTS IN
...

9-12
PORT
DI/AI 12

DO 01
CONTACTS OUT
...

...

1-6
PORT
DO 06

DO 07
CONTACTS OUT
...

...

7-12 AI: Analogue Input


PORT DI: Digital Input
DO 12 DO: Digital Output
GPIO: General Purpose Inputs/Outputs

1.3.1 Contact Input Ports

Each contact input port has four combined analogue and digital inputs. Each input has an internal pull-up
(4.7 kΩ). The internal pull-ups are enabled/disabled for all inputs of a particular port, not per input.
• CONTACTS IN 1-4: This port is identified as Group A on the PAVA SCT and contains contact inputs 1 to
4. The internal pull-ups are enabled/disabled on all inputs in Group A.
• CONTACTS IN 5-8: This port is identified as Group B on the PAVA SCT and contains contact inputs 5 to
8. The internal pull-ups are enabled/disabled on all inputs in Group B.
• CONTACTS IN 9-12: This port is identified as Group C on the PAVA SCT and contains contact inputs 9
to 12. The internal pull-ups are enabled/disabled on all inputs in Group C.

Notes on INTEGRA:
a) Screw terminals for external wiring are only provided for contact inputs 1 to 6.
b) Contact inputs 7 to 12 are reserved for internal use.
Contact input 9 is hardwired to the termination board and is used for the external Network Switch fault (if
fitted).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 16 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

The PAVA SCT automatically defines the input type and the internal pull-up configuration to suit the selected
function, and uses the following convention:
• Volt-free contacts: the internal pull-up is enabled providing the required voltage level, and the input is
configured as an analogue input; see connection examples in Figure 5 (page 17).
The connection to a volt-free contact can be unmonitored or monitored.

Figure 5 VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router on-board analogue input to volt-free contact connection (example)

Non-Monitored Contact

VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
(CONTACTS IN PORT)

+7 V
Router input thresholds:
• 0 to 3.3 V: contact closed

4k7 ohms
• > 3.3 V: contact open

ANALOGUE
INPUT # 100 kohms

10 kohms
NON-
MONITORED
CONTACT

0 V (e.g. INPUT PORT)


Cabling to Contact

Monitored Contact

VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
(CONTACTS IN PORT)

Router input thresholds: +7 V


• > 4.9 V: analogue input fault
• 1.1 V to 4.9 V: contact open
4k7 ohms

• 0.3 V to 1.1 V: contact closed


• < 0.3 V: analogue input fault
ANALOGUE
INPUT # 100 kohms

470 ohms
10 kohms

MONITORED 6k8 ohms


CONTACT

0 V (e.g. INPUT PORT)


Cabling to Contact

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 17 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

• Volt-driven contacts: the internal pull-up is disabled, i.e. the contact provides the required voltage level,
and the input is configured as a digital input; see connection examples in Figure 6 (page 18).
The connection to a volt-driven contact is always unmonitored.
Note that there is a 100 kΩ internal resistance to ground.

Figure 6 VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router on-board digital input to volt-driven contact connection (example)

Contact Closure to Ground


12-40 V VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
(CONTACTS IN PORT)

INTERNAL
PULL-UP
DISABLED

+
DIGITAL 100 kohms
I INPUT #

-
CONTACT OPTO ON
CLOSURE WHEN
TO GROUND CONTACT
CLOSED

Contact Closure to Supply (+VE going Input) Positive Voltage Source (+VE going Input)
12-40 V VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
(CONTACTS IN PORT) (CONTACTS IN PORT)

INTERNAL INTERNAL
CONTACT PULL-UP PULL-UP
CLOSURE DISABLED DISABLED
TO SUPPLY
12-40 V
+ FROM +
REMOTE
EQUIPMENT
100 kohms DIGITAL 100 kohms
DIGITAL
I INPUT # I INPUT #

- -
OPTO ON OPTO ON
WHEN WHEN
CONTACT CONTACT
CLOSED CLOSED

Fire Alarm Sounder Interface


FIRE VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router FIRE VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
SYSTEM (CONTACTS IN PORT) SYSTEM (CONTACTS IN PORT)

INTERNAL INTERNAL
PULL-UP PULL-UP
DISABLED DISABLED

-V Cabling to Fire System


+ +V Cabling to Fire System
+
RESISTOR (*)

RESISTOR (*)
END OF LINE

END OF LINE

DIGITAL 100 kohms DIGITAL 100 kohms


I INPUT # I INPUT #

+V I
- -V I
-
MONITORING OPTO OFF MONITORING OPTO ON

(*) Suitable End of Line Resistor to be fitted where the fire system wiring enters
the Router (e.g. the DIN rail terminals in the equipment rack).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 18 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

• Ambient Noise Sensor (ANS): the internal pull-up is disabled as the ANS device provides the required
voltage level, and the input is configured as an analogue input; see Figure 7 (page 19).
The connection to an ANS is always monitored for open and short-circuit faults.

Figure 7 VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router on-board analogue input to ANS connection

Ambient Noise Sensor (ANS)

VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
T100mA (CONTACTS IN PORT)
(FARNELL 1123190)
+SUPPLY (e.g. INPUT PORT)
Router input thresholds:
• > 4.8 V: analogue input fault
• 1 V to 4 V: ANS range
• < 0.6 V: analogue input fault
INTERNAL
PULL-UP
DISABLED
ANS +SUPPLY
ANALOGUE 100 kohms
OUTPUT INPUT #

(FARNELL 9341587)
0V

240R 1/4 W 1%

10 kohms
0V

Cable screen to back


box screw terminal
0 V (e.g. INPUT PORT)

• Volume Control (VC) and Programme Selector (PS): the internal pull-up is enabled providing the
required voltage level, and the input is configured as an analogue input; see Figure 8 (page 19).
The connection to a VC or PS is always monitored for open and short-circuit faults.

Figure 8 VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router on-board analogue input to VC/PS connection

Volume Control (VC) and Programme Selector (PS)

VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
VC/PS (CONTACTS IN PORT)

+7 V
12
Router input thresholds:
• > 4.9 V: analogue input fault
4k7 ohms

11 • 0.4 V to 4.8 V: positions 1 to 12


• < 0.3 V: analogue input fault
ANALOGUE
10 PIN 1 INPUT # 100 kohms
10 kohms

PIN 2

Cabling to VC/PS 0 V (e.g. INPUT PORT)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 19 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

1.3.2 Contact Output Ports

Each contact output port has six digital outputs (open-collector):


• CONTACTS OUT 1-6: contact outputs 1 to 6
• CONTACTS OUT 7-12: contact outputs 7 to 12

Notes on INTEGRA:
a) Screw terminals for external wiring are only provided for contact outputs 1 to 4.
b) Contact outputs 5 and 6 are used to control the fans locate at the rear of the enclosure.
c) External wiring to contact outputs 7 to 12 can be via direct connection to the Router inputs (RJ45) or via
optional BOA01/BOA02 Break-Out-Adaptor (screw terminals).
Figure 9 (page 20) shows an example of digital output connection. The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
always monitors the digital output connection for open and short-circuit faults.

Figure 9 VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router on-board digital output connection (example)

VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
(CONTACTS OUT PORT)

+Supply
(as 18-40 V power
supply input)
RELAY

DIGITAL
OUTPUT #

Active Low

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 20 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

2 Controls and Indicators

Item Description
power
Lit if the unit is receiving DC power.
(green)
voice alarm
Lit to indicate that a voice alarm condition is present in the PA/VA system.
(red)
Indicators (LED)

Lit to indicate that a system fault has been detected in the PA/VA system. This requires immediate
action as part(s) of the system used for emergency functions may have been affected. A system fault
will always cause the “fault” LED to be lit as well.
system fault
A system fault is triggered by a failure of any processor or memory, critical to the Voice Alarm system,
(yellow) including those of the VIPEDIA-12 itself.
A communication fault between the VIPEDIA-12and any equipment or device that has been configured
at the VIPEDIA-12 and that is critical to Voice Alarm functions will also trigger a system fault.
fault Lit to indicate that the unit has detected a fault.
(yellow) Flashes if a fault has not yet been accepted.

 The left and right arrow keys move the item selection in the direction selected, to the next item in the
 menu. The selected item is indicated by [brackets] around the selection.

 The up and down arrow keys toggle a selection, or increment a number, or a letter of the alphabet
 when editing.

SELECT Press after selecting an item to confirm the selection.


Press after selecting an item to cancel the selection.
BACK
If pressed repeatedly, it returns the display to the top-level menu.
Accepts all current faults, steadies the flashing fault LED indication, and turns off the audible alarm
FAULT ACCEPT
until a new fault condition occurs.
Clears all faults and sets all connected equipment to the “no faults” state, which also cancels any
FAULT CLEAR amplifier changeovers in effect. If there are any faults present in the system, then they are detected
anew, and reported again.
Keys

AUDIO MON Selects Audio Monitor sub-menu on the LCD display.


Tests all indicators on the front panel, the LCD display and the fault sounder.
The frame LEDs and rack fans of associated V2000 units and all indicators on associated V400/X400
frames are also tested.
The display shows “LAMP + LCD + SOUNDER TEST + FAN”, and then, solid white characters.
The menu locks for the entire duration of the test.
Notes:
LAMP TEST
a) The fault sounder is only tested on Fault Master units.
b) The V2000 built-in fan is not tested by the LAMP TEST function. It can be tested by pressing the
FAULT CLEAR key.
c) The audio level (dB) LEDs on the D150/D500 amplifiers are not tested. They can be tested by
routing audio to associated zones.
d) The V2000 rack fans will only be turned on if controlled by a GPIO digital output.
Press to clear previously configured text strings quickly during system configuration, or to return fields
DEFAULT
to their default values.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 21 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

3 EN 54-16 Dynamic Configuration Check List

Use this checklist to ensure you have configured all dynamic settings as required for EN 54-16 compliance.

Table 1 EN 54-16 configuration checklist

Item Refer to Section Page Configuration Task Check ()

Emergency 5.3.1.4 110 Check that the input surveillance is enabled and the correct fault
Microphones threshold level commissioned for all emergency microphones inputs.

5.3.1.6 113 Check that the EQ is enabled for all emergency microphone inputs
with the following setting to ensure a flat frequency response:
• Gain:- 3.3dB
• Frequency: 251Hz
• Q: 1

V400/X400 4.9.1 34 Check that Frame Learn is performed.


Amplifier
Frames 5.3.3.2 127 Check that all the output surveillance tone is commissioned (per
surveillance method) for all outputs carrying Voice Alarm signals.
• DC surveillance with EOL10K resistors: low frequency
Generator 1:
Frequency: Pulsed / 30Hz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width:
1.5s / Pulse Offset: 0.0s
Level (reference): -6 dB (adjust to ensure a nominal 1 to
1.5 V RMS)
Generator 2:
Frequency: Off
• AC surveillance with AEL01 or AEL02 Active End of Line
Device(s): low and high frequencies
Generator 1:
Frequency: Pulsed / 30Hz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width:
1.5s / Pulse Offset: 0.0s
Level (reference): -4 dB (adjust to ensure a nominal 1.5 V RMS)
Generator 2:
Frequency: Pulsed / 20kHz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse
Width: 10.0s / Pulse Offset: 0.1s
Level (reference): -21 dB (adjust to ensure a nominal 8 V RMS)
• Impedance monitoring: low frequency
Generator 1:
Frequency: Pulsed / 30Hz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width:
3.0s / Pulse Offset: 0.0s
Level (reference): -6 dB (adjust to ensure a nominal 1 to
1.5 V RMS. Can be adjusted to increase the output level up to
2 V RMS for stable impedance readings on low loads, typically
below 25 W)
Generator 2:
Frequency: Off

4.9.4.4 42 Check that the amplifier’s internal audio path surveillance is enabled
and correctly commissioned for all amplifiers (including standby
amplifiers) carrying Voice Alarm signals.
• Type: LF Surv
• Interval: 20 seconds
• Input threshold (reference): 200 mV to 250 mV
• Output threshold (reference): 600 mV to 900 mV

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 22 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Item Refer to Section Page Configuration Task Check ()

4.9.4.5 44 Check that the speaker line surveillance is enabled and the correct
fault thresholds commissioned (per surveillance type) for all
amplifiers slots (working amplifiers only) carrying Voice Alarm
signals.

4.9.4.6 50 Check that the speaker line Earth Leakage monitoring is enabled for
all amplifiers slots (working amplifiers only) carrying Voice Alarm
signals.

V2000 5.3.3.2 127 Check that all the output surveillance tone is commissioned as
Amplifier described below for all outputs carrying Voice Alarm signals.
Frame
• Generator 1:
Frequency: On / 20Hz / Pulse Interval: Not used / Pulse Width:
Not used / Pulse Offset: Not used
Level: -30 dB (always)
• Generator 2:
Frequency: Off

Refer to the V2000 User’s Check that the surveillance tone is commissioned as described
Manual (U-0623-1005) below for all amplifier slots (including standby amplifiers) carrying
Voice Alarm signals.
• LF Tone: enabled / 1.5 V
• HF Tone: enabled (if impedance monitoring is used) / 4 V

Check that the amplifier’s internal audio path surveillance is enabled


and correctly commissioned for all amplifiers (including standby
amplifiers) carrying Voice Alarm signals.
• Tolerance: 40%
• Low threshold (reference): 840 mV (D150) / 960 mv (D500)
• High threshold (reference): 1960 mV (D150) / 2240 mv (D500)

Check that the input surveillance tone is commissioned for all


amplifiers slots (working amplifiers only) carrying Voice Alarm
signals.
• Tolerance: 40%
• Threshold (reference at 100 V): 14 mV
• Threshold (reference at 70 V): 10 mV
• Threshold (reference at 50 V): 7 mV

Check that the speaker line surveillance is enabled and the correct
fault thresholds commissioned (per surveillance type) for all
amplifiers slots (working amplifiers only) carrying Voice Alarm
signals.
Warnings:
a) At the time of the publication of this document, the following
speaker line surveillance methods are approved for use in
EN 54-16 systems:
• DC-EOL monitoring
• Impedance monitoring
b) NA

Check that the speaker line Earth Leakage monitoring is


commissioned for all amplifiers slots (working amplifiers only)
carrying Voice Alarm signals.
Threshold: 2 mA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 23 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4 Front Panel Operation

The operation described here is correct for the current version of the VIPEDIA-12 at the time of the
publication of this document (Host CP V3.3.0.2).
If the VIPEDIA-12 in your system has a later (or earlier) version of software, then it may mean that some
aspects of the operation are subtly different from the operation described in this document, or that enhanced
features have been added.
If any difficulties are encountered, contact ASL or an appointed ASL distributor, quoting the Build Standard
and software versions of your VIPEDIA-12 unit; see Section “6.2.1 Build Standard and Software Versions”
(page 159).

4.1 Initialisation
The VIPEDIA-12 automatically starts up when powered on. See an example of initialisation display sequence
in Figure 10 below.

Figure 10 Initialisation display sequence (example)

* * * * * V I P E D I A – 12 * * * * *
Initialising – please wait ...

Restart caused by...


Power on

PAVA-SCTSystemConfiguration_Filename
Loading static configuration
Static Configuration OK

PAVA-SCTSystemConfiguration_Filename
Checking system configuration file
File checking: 10%

FPGA_Filename
Loading FPGA
Loading FPGA: 15%

DSP_Filename
Loading DSP
Loading DSP: 20%

Vipedia V3.3.0.2P Verifying Router dynamic configuration


Dynamic Configuration OK

THIS UNIT’S NAME 11:33:28


Top-level fault status display
FAULTS 0/0/0

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 24 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.2 LCD Menu Display


The VIPEDIA-12 menu system is intuitive and the user will find the menus largely self-explanatory.
Note that the VIPEDIA-12 is password protected to prevent unauthorised alteration of the system
configuration. Thus, the system configuration cannot be changed unless the operator is logged on by
entering a valid access code. When the operator is logged off it is possible to view all the information apart
from the access code. Refer to Section “4.4 Accessing the VIPEDIA-12” (page 28) for details.

4.2.1 Display Information


Figure 11 Examples of display

Example 1: No faults in the PAVA system Example 2: Faults present in the system

THIS UNIT’S NAME 11:33:28 THIS UNIT’S NAME 11:33:28


FAULTS 0/0/0 FAULTS 1/2/0 POWER FUSE PATH EARTH

Example 3: Voice Alarm active Example 4: Top-level menu

VOICE ALARM 11:33:28 THIS UNIT’S NAME 11:33:28


FAULTS 0/0/0 Faults Access Configuration Test

Top-Level Fault Status Display

The top line displays the unit name:


• The unit name as defined in PAVA SCT configuration, or VOICE ALARM (flashing) if Voice Alarm is
active or VA SILENCED (flashing) if Voice Alarm is silenced (or VA Silence is active).
• The current time is displayed on the right-hand side.
The bottom line displays the overall fault status of the system; see Examples 1, 2 and 3 in Figure 11
(page 25):
• The fault count indicates the number of faults present in the system and it may be preceded by one or
two exclamation marks as described in Figure 13 (page 26).
• If a power, fuse, path, or earth fault is reported that affects the Voice Alarm system, the appropriate text
will be displayed flashing (POWER, FUSE, PATH and/or EARTH) on the bottom line; see Example 2 in
Figure 11 (page 25) and Figure 13 (page 26).
Refer to Section “4.10 Fault Monitoring” (page 51) for further information on fault monitoring.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 25 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 12 Top-level fault status display overview

THIS UNIT’S NAME 11:33:28


!!FAULTS 2/5/0 POWER FUSE PATH EARTH

EN 54 -16 faults: They indicate a power,


fuse, path, or earth fault has been reported
in the PA/VA system that affects the Voice
Alarm system.

• Third number:
This is the total number of VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers that are offline; see
which units are offline via Faults>Summary.
VIPxxx and FRMxxx OFF LINE faults are not included in the fault count.
• Second number:
This is the total number of faults present in the PA/VA cluster; see faults status of
each VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router via Faults>Summary.
• First number:
This is the total number of local faults; see fault list via Faults>Active.

Second exclamation mark (!): It indicates that a comms fault with a peripheral (microphone, BMB01 and
V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame) that is attached to this unit has been reported.
Note that the comms fault exclamation mark is not latched.

First exclamation mark (!): It indicates a critical fault within this unit or in its DBB connection.
The following fault can drive the critical fault exclamation mark:
• Static configuration fault
• DSP/FPGA faults
• Memory and processor faults
• Any Network Card fault
• DBB faults (audio or Ethernet)
The critical fault exclamation mark is latched for all faults except for the DBB Ethernet fault.

These indications do not propagate do other units in system.

Top-Level Menu

The top line displays the unit name; see Example 2 in Figure 11 (page 25):
• The unit name as defined in PAVA SCT configuration, or VOICE ALARM (flashing) if Voice Alarm is
active or VA SILENCED (flashing) if Voice Alarm is silenced (or VA Silence is active).
• The current time is displayed on the right-hand side.
The bottom line displays the menu options.

Submenus

The top line displays the menu description on the right-hand side, and whether the user is logged on or
logged off on the left-hand side. When the user is logged on, it identifies which user’s access level: Access 2
or Access 3; see examples in Figure 13 (page 26).

Figure 13 Example of display (submenu)

Example 1: No faults in the PAVA system Example 2: Faults present in the system

CONFIGURATION MENU [Access3] VOICE ALARM [Access3]


Router Frames Router Frames

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 26 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

If a Voice Alarm condition is present or silenced in the PA/VA system, the VOICE ALARM or VA SILENCED
message will alternate with the current text on the left-hand side; see Example 2 in Figure 13 (page 26).
The bottom line displays the menu options.

4.2.2 Menu Selection Markers

Different markers are used to aid menu navigation as described in Table 2 (page 27).

Table 2 Menu selection markers

Marker Description

[square brackets] Indicate this option is an editable field or can be scrolled using the up
and down arrows
{curly braces} Indicate this option is read-only, for instance when the user is logged off
arrows both sides Indicate this option leads to a submenu
arrow on left, bracket on right] Indicates this option can be scrolled using the up and down arrows and
when selected will lead to a submenu for the selection.

4.2.3 Menu Navigation and Selection Controls

The front panel keys and rotary encoder are used for menu navigation and control as described in Table 3
(page 27).

Table 3 Menu navigation and selection controls

Controls Description

 and  keys To moves to the next item in the menu


 and  keys or To edit or scroll options (use the rotary encoder for fast increment and
Rotary encoder decrement)
SELECT key To select a [highlighted] item or to save the changes
BACK key To exit from the current menu and to return to the parent menu without
saving changes
Rotary encoder To adjust the volume during audio monitoring (Tests menu)

4.2.4 Menu Timeouts

All menus timeout to revert to the previous (higher) level menu after two minutes with no user activity. If
logged on, then after five minutes with no activity the user is logged off. Thus, with no user activity the LCD
display always returns to the top-level display and logged off state.

4.3 LCD Backlight


The LCD backlight is turned on when any button is pressed and stays on for five minutes after the last key
press has occurred. Should a fault or Voice Alarm condition occur, the backlight is automatically turned on:
• Fault condition: the backlight is turned on for one hour following the indication of a new fault condition.
• Voice Alarm condition: the backlight is turned on for one hour following the indication of a new Voice
Alarm condition. The backlight will be turned off, if the Voice Alarm condition is removed within the one-
hour timeout.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 27 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.4 Accessing the VIPEDIA-12


The VIPEDIA-12 is password protected to prevent unauthorised alteration of the unit configuration. Thus, the
unit configuration cannot be changed unless the operator is logged on by entering a valid access code.
When the operator is logged off it is possible to view all the information apart from the access code.
The top line of all submenus displays whether the user is logged on or logged off on the left-hand side. When
the user is logged on, it identifies which user’s access level: “Access 2” or “Access 3”.

Only qualified personnel who are very familiar with the VIPEDIA-12 equipment, the installation
and its configuration requirements should log on to alter the system configuration.
Any adjustment of audio parameters or DVA zoning may leave the system in a dangerous state
where it will not correctly respond to alarm inputs or may not produce adequate sound pressure
levels or intelligibility to comply with Voice Alarm Standards.
Similarly, it is possible for the untrained operator to inadvertently disable system surveillance
functions that are mandated by Voice Alarm standards.
When the user is logged on, accessing the functions and options should be done with great care.
Pressing the SELECT key saves any configuration changes and recalling the previous
configuration may not be possible.
If required, contact ASL or an appointed ASL distributor for support.

It is highly recommended that the front access codes be set to non-default values; see Section
“4.7 Changing the Front Panel Access Code (PIN)” (page 29)

4.5 Logging On
The VIPEDIA-12 provides two security access levels with separate access codes: Access Level 2 and
Access Level 3.

To log on:

1. Select ConfigurationAccess.
2. Enter the access code and press SELECT.
The default access code to the system is available from ASL or appointed ASL distributor.
• <Access Level 2 PIN>: logs on with Access Level 2 with restricted access to the system. The user
can only clear faults, either via the FAULT CLEAR button or via the menu.
• <Access Level 3 PIN>: logs on with Access Level 3 with full access to the system.

4.6 Logging Off


Note that the system will automatically log the user off after five minutes without any user interaction.

To log off:

Select ConfigurationAccessLog Off.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 28 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.7 Changing the Front Panel Access Code (PIN)


The access code can only be changed if the user is logged onto the system with full access, i.e. with Access
Level 3.
It is highly recommended that the access codes be set to non-default values.

To change the access code(s):

1. Log on with Access Level 3 access code via ConfigurationAccess menu option if not already done.
2. Select ConfigurationAccessChange-PIN.
Note: This submenu is not displayed at Access Level 2.
3. Select the required access level, change the password, and then press SELECT.

4.8 VIPEDIA-12 Front Panel Configuration


This section only describes the parameters that are accessed and/or configured from the unit’s front panel
and are correct for the VIPEDIA-12 software package version at the time of publication (Host CP V3.3.0.2).
If any difficulties are encountered, contact ASL or an appointed ASL distributor, quoting the Build Standard
and software versions of your VIPEDIA-12 unit; see Section “6.2.1 Build Standard and Software Versions”
(page 159).

Notes:

a) The audio settings configuration is described in Section “5 VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool”
(page 94).
b) The system configuration is not described in this document. Please refer to the VIPEDIA-12 System
Configuration Tool User’s Manual for further details of the system configuration.
c) The Network Card configuration is not described in this document. Please refer to the help files of the
VIPA Configuration Tool (VCT).

4.8.1 IP Address, Netmask, Gateway and MAC Address Configuration

Consult the PAVA SCT system configuration to obtain the IP address configuration for your VIPEDIA-12 unit.
This includes the unit’s IP address, the gateway address, and the subnet mask.

Factory default IP configuration:

• IP Address: 192.168.1.10
• Gateway Address: 192.168.1.0
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
• MAC address: unique address

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 29 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To configure the IP address, Netmask and Gateway:

1. Log on with Access Level 3 access code via ConfigurationAccess menu option if not already done.
2. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigIP Addr.
3. Configure the IP address and press SELECT.
4. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigSubnet.
5. Configure the subnet mask and press SELECT.
6. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigGateway.
7. Configure the gateway address and press SELECT.
8. Logout to reboot the unit.
Notes:
a) A reboot is required for IP settings and unit ID to take effect.
b) The Router automatically logs the user out five minutes after the last key press.

To verify the MAC address:

The unit’s MAC address can be viewed via the ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigMAC menu
option.
Note that the MAC address cannot be changed by the user.

4.8.2 Unit Identity Configuration

4.8.2.1 Configuring the Unit’s ID

The Unit ID is used by the system to uniquely identify each VIPEDIA-12 unit in the system.
It is possible for multiple independent VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA subsystems with overlapping Unit IDs to co-
exist in the same network where it is not possible to allocate a unique Unit ID. An application running ASL’s
VIPA software suite such as the ASL’s iVENCS Control System can integrate these subsystems.
In such system each VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA subsystem is allocated unique multicast control and PMC
multicast base addresses which provide each subsystem with unique data and audio channels. This enables
each subsystem to differentiate between multiple units with overlapping IDs. Refer to the PA/VA System
Configuration Tool User’s Manual for further details.
Consult your system design documentation to obtain the unit ID for the VIPEDIA-12 unit(s).

To configure the unit’s ID:

1. Log on with Access Level 3 access code via ConfigurationAccess menu option if not already done.
2. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdId.
System default configuration: “1”
Possible values: “1” to “63”
3. Configure the unit ID as defined in the PAVA SCT system configuration, and then press SELECT.
4. Logout to reboot the unit.
Notes:
a) A reboot is required for IP settings and unit ID to take effect.
b) The Router automatically logs the user out five minutes after the last key press.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 30 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.8.2.2 Verifying the Unit’s Name

The VIPEDIA-12 name defined in the PAVA SCT system configuration is ‘loaded’ into the
ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityName front panel menu option. The unit’s name is no
longer configured from the front panel menu option.
INTEGRA name is also displayed on the top-line of the front panel display; see examples in Section
“4.2.1 Display Information” (page 25).

4.8.3 Configuring the Date and Time

The VIPEDIA-12 features a real time clock, which is used for date and time stamping of log entries such as
fault reports. This is fitted with an internal Lithium battery so that the clock continues running without power
applied.
Note that this is only required on the Time Master VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router where no external time
source has been configured and commissioned (e.g. GPS, HCP or NTP server via a Network Card).

To configure the date and time:

1. Log on with Access Level 3 access code via ConfigurationAccess menu option if not already done.
2. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityDate/Time.
3. Configure the date and time and press SELECT.

4.8.4 Configuring the UTC Offset (for GPS time synchronization only)

A GPS (Global Positioning System) device can be used to synchronize the time of a VIPEDIA-12 unit which
can then be configured as Time Master for other VIPEDIA-12 units in the system.
The VIPEDIA-12 supports the NMEA0183 RMC GPS message format. This format is available on Garmin
GPS 18 PC or LVC. Please refer to the GPS device documentation for configuration and other details.
The GPS time matches UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The time provided by the GPS for
synchronization can be adjusted according to the DST (Daylight Saving Time) and local time zone.

To adjust the UTC offset:

1. Log on with Access Level 3 access code via ConfigurationAccess menu option if not already done.
2. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityUTC offset.
3. Configure the offset and press SELECT.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 31 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.8.5 Verifying the Software Version

The VIPEDIA-12 software version is changed from time to time. The version of the currently installed
software can be verified from the front panel.

To verify the software version:

1. Select ConfigurationRouterIdentityS/Ware.
2. Scroll the list to display the version of each software component; see Table 4 below.

[Host CP : 3.3.0.2P]

Note: The Host CP version is referred as the VIPEDIA-12 SW version in this document unless other
code is specified, e.g., DSP SW.
3. Press SELECT or BACK to return to the parent menu.

Table 4 VIPEDIA-12 firmware version and configuration checksum

Item Version/Data (examples) Description


Host CP 3.3.0.2P This is the version of the Host Processor firmware.
Notes:
a) This is the VIPEDIA-12 software version.
b) The Host CP version should be quoted in all inquiries along with
the version of the DSP, FPGA and NETCARD VIPA (if a Network
Card is fitted).
UI CP 2.1.27 This is the version of User Interface Processor (UIP) firmware.
The UIP provides the interface between the Host Processor and the
front panel display and controls. It also manages the digital contact
outputs.
DSP 3.3.0.2P This is the version of the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) firmware.
The DSP provides the required audio signal conditioning and routing
under the control of the Host Processor.
CPLD 11.0.0.0 (0xb) This is the version of the CPLD firmware.
Decimal and hex formats of the version are displayed. The hex format
(e.g. 0xb) is used on this document.
Programmed in manufacturing.
FPGA 22.0.0.0 (0x16) This is the version of the FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array)
firmware.
Decimal and hex formats of the version are displayed. The hex format
(e.g. 0x16) is normally use when referring to the FPGA version.
The FPGA is responsible for routing the audio via the DBB interface,
the Network Card and Dante™ channels.
NETCARD VIPA 3.3.0.55P This is the version of the main firmware on the Network Card.
Notes:
a) The main firmware on the Network Card is also known as NET-
VIPA. This is the Network Card software version.
b) Not Available is displayed if there is no comms between the
Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared).
c) Only updated after reboot or configuration load.
NETCARD KERNEL 3.3.0.1P This is the version of kernel on the Network Card.
The kernel is the central module of the OS (Operating System).
Notes:
a) Not Available is displayed if there is no comms between the
Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared).
b) Only updated after reboot or configuration load.
c) Programmed in manufacturing.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 32 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Item Version/Data (examples) Description


NETCARD ROOTFS 3.0.0.1P This is the version of the root file system image (/) in the flash memory
on the Network Card.
The root file system contains all the programs necessary for the OS to
start.
Notes:
a) Not Available is displayed if there is no comms between the
Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared).
b) Only updated after reboot or configuration load.
c) Programmed in manufacturing.
NETCARD ETCFS 3.0.0.1P This is version of the etcetera filesystem image (/etc) in the flash
memory on the Network Card.
The etcetera filesystem contains all the initial configuration which is
then modified by the configuration tools (as needed).
Notes:
a) Not Available is displayed if there is no comms between the
Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared).
b) Only updated after reboot or configuration load.
c) Programmed in manufacturing.
NETCARD DOM 0.0.0.1 This is the version of disk image on the Network Card.
Notes:
a) Not Available is displayed if there is no comms between the
Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared).
b) Only updated after reboot or configuration load.
c) Programmed in manufacturing.
NETCARD UBOOT 3.0.0.1P This is the version of the U-Boot used by the Network Card.
U-Boot is a universal bootloader and it is used to boot the Linux kernel.
Notes:
a) Not Available is displayed if there is no comms between the
Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared).
b) Only updated after reboot or configuration load.
c) Programmed in manufacturing.
d) Version on front panel shows 0.0.0.6 for old Network Cards,
where 2010.06 is the version on the VCT.
STATIC CFG DAT=451c73a6 XML=106c1b25 This is the checksum of the static configuration as calculated by the
Host Processor:
• DAT: checksum of the binary configuration of the specific unit.
• XML: checksum of the system XML configuration. Should be
same on all units.
Notes:
a) The Host Processor uses proprietary algorithm to calculate the
checksum. Therefore, the checksum obtained for the XML
configuration file using publicly available checksum calculation
methods will not match the checksum that is displayed on the
front panel.
b) NA
DYNAMIC CFG 18fa4 This is the checksum of the dynamic configuration (binary format) as
calculated by the Host Processor.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 33 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.8.6 Verifying Network Card IP Address (if fitted and configured)

The Network Card IP settings and hostname can be viewed on the unit’s front panel via the
ConfigurationRouterIdentityNetCard menu option.
Note that the menu options only display the Network Card settings if there is comms between the Router and
its Network Card.
If there is no comms between the Router and the Network Card (e.g. when a Network Card is not
fitted/configured or Vipedia config is cleared), the menu options will display as follows.
• IP Addr: The Router’s control multicast address.
• Gateway: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet: 0.0.0.0
• MAC: 00:00:00:00:00:00
• H/Name: Not available

4.9 ASL Amplifier Frame Commissioning


This section describes the V400 and X400 Amplifier Frames commissioning which is carried out from the
VIPEDIA-12 front panel.
Please refer to the Amplifier Mainframe, Amplifier, and Interface Card user documentation to complement the
information provided in the following sections.

Notes:

a) The V2000 Amplifier Mainframe requires the V2000 Dynamic Tool.


b) The V2000 commissioning procedure is not part of this User’s Manual, please refer to the V2000 User’s
Manual; see Table 21 (page 175).

4.9.1 Learning Connected V400 and X400 Amplifier Frames


The “Learn” function allows the system to automatically find all ASL V400 and X400 Amplifier Frames and
amplifiers that are connected to the VIPEDIA-12 via an Audio-CAN serial data network and audio monitor
bus. Once the system has found the installed configuration, each frame configuration will be available for
viewing and commissioning.
The act of commissioning commands the frame to recognise the current amplifier installation as the correct
one, e.g. if an amplifier is removed and no longer required, then a fault will be reported that the amplifier is
not present until the frame is re-commissioned. Once re-commissioned the frame will recognise that the
missing amplifier is correctly missing and will stop reporting a fault.

Notes:

a) The “Learn” is not used with V2000 Amplifier Frames which are connected to the VIPEDIA-12 system via
an IP network.
b) The VIPEDIA-12 when configured with V400/X400 Amplifier Frames checks if the “Learn” function has
been performed following a power cycle or a fault clearance. If no frames are configured, then a fault will
be raised. This is to prevent the “Learn” step from being omitted when VIPEDIA-12 units are swapped
out on site, and as consequence, the frame and amplifier related faults not being reported. The fault is
automatically suppressed on VIPEDIA-12 units with no V400/X400 Amplifier Frames configured.
c) Refer to the PAVA SCT User’s Manual for details; see Table 21 (page 175).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 34 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To learn and commission the connected V400/X400 Amplifier Frames:

1. Select ConfigurationFramesLearn.
Total number of mainframes found
Total number of amplifiers found
Total number of mainframes configured
Total number of amplifiers configured

LEARNING – FRAME/AMPS – 02/007 [10/035]

Please wait…

Notes:
1) The VIPEDIA-12 will lock out the user whilst each amplifier frame is interrogated in turn.
2) The total number of frames and amplifiers that are configured in the system configuration is
displayed on the right-end of the top line ([frames/amplifiers]).
3) The total number of frames and amplifiers currently found are displayed on the top line
(frames/amplifiers). In the example above, 02/007, indicates that a total so far of 2 frames and 7
amplifiers have been found.
4) The display is updated as each frame/amplifier is found.
2. At the end of the Learn process, a list containing all amplifier frames found on the CAN bus is displayed.
SLOT 1

SLOT 2

SLOT 3

SLOT 4

[F05 X400 200W/0 – 100W/0 100W/0]

No amplifier fitted into the slot.

Identifies the number of outputs configured for the amplifier:


‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, ‘8’, ‘12’, or ‘16’
The default setting is ‘0’.
The number of outputs on a standby amplifier must be ‘1’.
Not shown for V400 mainframe.

X400: Identifies the amplifier as working (‘W’) or standby (‘S’).


The default setting is ‘W’
V400: Identifies the surveillance circuit (‘N’ for single, ‘D’ for dual, or ‘L’ for
loop return) or a standby amplifier (‘S’)

Identifies the amplifier power: ‘100’, ‘200’, or ‘400’.

Identifies the mainframe type: ‘X400’ or ‘V400’.

Identifies the mainframe address: ‘F01’ to ‘F63’.

Notes:
1) Whilst “Learning” is in progress, data is read from each frame, but no data is changed at the frame
itself. Commissioning is required in order to change the data at the frame.
2) If no frame is found, then the “NO FRAMES FOUND” message will be displayed.
a) Check the VIPEDIA-12 has been configured with amplifiers.
b) Check CAN bus connections.
c) Check that the end of the CAN bus is terminated
d) Repeat the above steps.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 35 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

3) If number of frames and/or amplifiers found on the CAN bus does not match the system
configuration, “Learned/config’d frames mismatch” message will be displayed. Check that the
system configuration matches the frame hardware configuration, update the VIPEDIA-12 system
configuration (if changed), and then repeat the above steps.
4) The timeout on the menu is extended by 10 seconds every time a new frame and/or amplifier is
discovered.
Therefore, it takes additional 10 seconds for the list of learned frames and amplifiers to be displayed
after Learn has completed. Press SELECT if the list is not displayed after 10 seconds.
3. Scroll the amplifier frame list and confirm that the VIPEDIA-12 found all frames and amplifiers and that
their configuration is correct.
If the frame or amplifier configuration is incorrect, check the frame hardware configuration:
- The Frame ID is correctly set on the front panel rotary switches
- Slot is fitted with correct amplifier type
- Interface card type and setting) are correct
and then repeat the steps above.
Notes:
The VIPEDIA-12 only reports faults for frames and amplifiers that are present in the system
configuration.
4. Press SELECT to commission the installed/updated frame so that the frame recognises the current
amplifier installation as the correct one.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 36 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.9.2 Viewing Configured Frames

4.9.2.1 Verbose View

The verbose view provides a frame’s software version, as well as each amplifier’s software version number,
power rating, and surveillance mode.
Follow the instructions below to view the details of an amplifier frame.

To view V400/X400 Amplifier Frames:

1. Select ConfigurationFramesViewVerbose.
2. A list of configured frames is displayed.
• V400 Amplifier Frame:
[Frame02 1.2] Slot1 v23.4 100W Standby
‘Standby’: identifies a standby amplifier
‘Single’: identifies a single circuit surveillance mode
‘Dual’: identifies a dual circuit surveillance mode
‘Loop’: identifies a loop return surveillance mode
‘Not-Conf’: no amplifier fitted into the slot

Identifies the amplifier power: ‘100W’, ‘200W’, or ‘400W’.

Identifies the surveillance card software version.

Identifies the slot number: ‘Slot1’ to ‘Slot4’.

Identifies the mainframe software version.

Identifies the mainframe address: ‘Frame01’ to ‘Frame63’.

• X400 Amplifier Frame:


[Frame04 2.5.0119] Slot1 200W/8

Identifies the number of outputs configured for the


amplifier: ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, ‘8’, ‘12’, or ‘16’.

Identifies the amplifier type: working (‘W’) or standby (‘S’).

Identifies the amplifier power: ‘100’, ‘200’, or ‘400’.

Identifies the slot number: ‘Slot1’ to ‘Slot4’.

Identifies the mainframe software version.

Identifies the mainframe address: ‘Frame01’ to ‘Frame63’.

Notes:
1) If the software version is available, then is shown as in the above example, else “V?.? ” is displayed.
2) Pressing the DEFAULT key will display the Slot 1 configuration.
3. Scroll the frame list (left field) to view another frame configuration, or scroll the slot field (right field) to
view a different slot configuration within the currently selected frame.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 37 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.9.2.2 Terse View

The terse view provides a single list of configured frames with the amplifier power rating and surveillance
mode compressed into a single line.
Follow the instructions below to view an amplifier frame.

To view V400/X400 Amplifier Frames:

1. Select ConfigurationFramesViewTerse.
2. A list of configured frames is displayed.
SLOT 1

SLOT 2

SLOT 3

[F04 X400 200W/8 – 100S/1 100W/4] SLOT 4

No amplifier fitted into the slot.

Identifies the number of outputs configured for the amplifier: ‘0’,


‘1’, ‘2’, ‘4’, ‘8’, ‘12’, or ‘16’.
Not shown for V400 mainframe.

X400: Identifies the amplifier as working (‘W’) or standby (‘S’).


V400: Identifies the surveillance circuit (‘N’ for single, ‘D’ for dual, or ‘L’ for loop return) or
a standby amplifier (‘S’).

Identifies the amplifier power: ‘100’, ‘200’, or ‘400’.

Identifies the mainframe type: ‘X400’ or ‘V400’.

Identifies the mainframe address: ‘F01’ to ‘F63’.

4.9.3 Configuring the Frame Temperature Alarm

Each frame can monitor its ambient temperature if required, and will then report a fault if the temperature
exceeds the configured over-temperature alarm value.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnTemp.

Possible values: “Not-Conf” / “Config’d” and “15” to “99”°C


System default configuration: V400: “Config’d” and “70” / X400: “Not-Conf” and “70”

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 38 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.9.4 Commissioning an Amplifier Slot

Each amplifier frame houses up to four amplifiers, each inserted into one of the four available amplifier slots.
These slots are referred to as Slot 1, Slot 2, Slot 3 and Slot 4 at the VIPEDIA-12.
Each amplifier may be commissioned for AC internal audio path surveillance, loudspeaker line surveillance,
and Earth Leakage detection as described in the following sections.

4.9.4.1 Editing an Amplifier Slot Description

A description can be assigned to each amplifier slot. This name is for reference only, and is only shown in
menus accessing frame slots, such as, amplifier slot commissioning and test menus.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnDesc

Possible values: alphanumeric string of up to 12 characters


System default configuration: blank

4.9.4.2 Configuring the Amplifier Type (X400 only)

The X400 Amplifier Frame requires that the amplifier type (Working or Standby) be configured for each of the
installed amplifiers.
On the V400 Amplifier Frame the amplifier type is detected and commissioned using the “Learn” function, as
described in Section “4.9.1 Learning Connected V400 and X400 Amplifier Frames” (page 34).

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnType

Possible values: “Working” and “Standby”


System default configuration: “Working”

4.9.4.3 Configuring the Number of Outputs Driven by an Amplifier (X400 only)

As standard, each amplifier module fitted into a X400 feeds 4 outputs (A, B, C, and D). Alternatively,
amplifiers can be fitted feeding 8, 12, or 16 outputs. This is achieved by fitting the required amplifier into an
amplifier slot that is ganged to one or more adjacent slots. Note that only amplifiers fitted to slots 1 and 3 can
be ganged to adjacent slots and that ganged slots require inter-channel link to be fitted as shown in Table 5
(page 40) and Figure 14 (page 41).

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceSlotsNo Output

Possible values: “No Output”, “1-Output”, “2-Outputs”, “4-Outputs”, “8-Outputs”, and “16-Outputs”
System default configuration: “No Output”

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 39 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

1) Only 1 and 2-Outputs configurations can be used for AC Line Monitoring with AEL01/AEL02.
2) The number of outputs on a standby amplifier must be “1-Output”, and this is automatically
set by the system.
3) The number of ganged slots is automatically updated by the VIPEDIA-12.
4) If more than one ganged slot is configured:
• inter-channel links must be fitted on the amplifier motherboard as described in Table 5
(page 40) and Figure 14 (page 41).
• Impedance Monitoring, then the load should be distributed across the ganged slots each
feeding independent speaker circuits.
5) The outputs are sequentially numbered at the VIPEDIA-12so that:
• “O/P #1” corresponds to “output A” of the slot which the amplifier is fitted to (first ganged
slot)
• “O/P #5” corresponds to “output A” of the second ganged slot (if any)
• “O/P #9” corresponds to “output A” of the third ganged slot (if any)
• “O/P #10” corresponds to “output A” of the fourth ganged slot (if any)

X400 Amplifier Configuration

Table 5 X400 amplifier configuration options

Amplifier Can be fitted Number of Inter-channel Links


Number of Outputs
Type into slots Ganged Slots (see Figure 14)

1 4 (standard) None
2 8 to slot 2
Slot 1
3 12 to slots 2 and 3
4 16 to slots 2, 3, and 4
MX100
Slot 2 1 4 (standard) None
1 4 (standard) None
Slot 3
2 8 Slot 4
Slot 4 1 4 (standard) None
1 4 (standard) None
2 8 to slot 2
Slot 1
3 12 to slots 2 and 3
MX200
4 16 to slots 2, 3, and 4
1 4 (standard) None
Slot 3
2 8 to slot 4
1 4 (standard) None
2 8 to slot 2
MX400 Slot 1
3 12 to slots 2 and 3
4 16 to slots 2, 3, and 4

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 40 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 14 X400 inter-channel link settings

FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION (NO LINKS FITTED)

SLOT 1  4 OUTPUTS SLOT 2  4 OUTPUTS SLOT 3  4 OUTPUTS SLOT 4  4 OUTPUTS

SLOT 1  8 OUTPUTS SLOT 3  8 OUTPUTS

FITTED NOT FITTED FITTED

SLOT 1  12 OUTPUTS SLOT 4  4 OUTPUTS

FITTED FITTED NOT FITTED

SLOT 1  16 OUTPUTS

FITTED FITTED FITTED

FRONT
SLOT 1

SLOT 2

SLOT 3

SLOT 4

(X400 with front panel removed.


Only main components shown for clarity)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 41 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.9.4.4 Commissioning an Amplifier’s Internal Audio Path AC Surveillance

The amplifier’s internal audio path surveillance is accomplished by detection of infrasonic tones at the
amplifier output and input terminals. The surveillance tone level is monitored at the amplifier input and
output, and any reduction from the configured threshold levels will be reported as a fault.

1) The VIPEDIA-12 should be configured to generate the required surveillance tone; see
Section “4.2.3.3.2 Configuring the Output Surveillance Tone” (page 127).
2) VIPEDIA-12 outputs connected to ASL Amplifier Frames (V400 and X400) should have the
Hard Clipper enabled at +2dBu; see Section “5.3.3.10 Configuring the Hard Clipper” (page
142). The Hard Clipper limits the programme audio so it does not intermodulate with the
surveillance tone.
3) For EN 54-16 and BS 5839-8 compliance and where the amplifier’s internal audio path AC
surveillance is required, the AC surveillance must be enabled and all parameters must be
configured and commissioned for all amplifiers, including all standby amplifiers.

To commission the AC surveillance:

1. Set surveillance tone frequency type to “LF” for each amplifier (working and standby).

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot nnSurveillanceAmplifierTypeLF Surv

Possible values: “No Surv”, “LF Surv”, “HF Surv”


System default configuration: “LF Surv”
• “Not Surv”
The amplifier health is not monitored.
• “LF Surv”
The amplifier health and internal audio path are monitored by means of a low frequency AC
surveillance tone with nominal frequency of 30 Hz which is superimposed on the VIPEDIA-12 output.
The surveillance tone level is monitored at the amplifier input and output, and any reduction from the
configured threshold levels will be reported as a fault.
The amplifier health and internal audio path are monitored by means of a low frequency AC
surveillance tone with nominal frequency of 30 Hz which is superimposed on the VIPEDIA-12 output.
The surveillance tone level is monitored at the amplifier input and output by the built-in surveillance
circuit in a X400 frame or the Surveillance Interfaces Card fitted to a V400 frame, and any reduction
from the configured threshold levels will be reported as a fault:
• “HF Surv”
This setting is used when the surveillance circuit uses a high frequency surveillance tone in order to
monitor the connected amplifier, e.g. the ASL Surveillance Interface Card used in customised high
frequency applications. Option not supported by the X400 Amplifier Frame at the time of the
publication of this document. Please refer to ASL for further details.
2. Set the surveillance interval to 20 seconds for each working amplifier.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceAmplifierInterval

Possible values: “00” to “50” seconds


System default configuration: “20” seconds
The system must detect pulses at this interval or more regularly; see Figure 15 (page 43). If pulses are
not received within this interval, a fault will be reported.
In a typical ASL system the surveillance tone interval is set to 20 seconds.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 42 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Notes:
a) If the interval is set to “00” the system must detect a continuous surveillance tone. Otherwise, a fault
will be reported.
b) The standby amplifier monitors a continuous surveillance tone generated internally by the amplifier
frame. The system automatically sets the interval to “00” for a standby amplifier.

Figure 15 Surveillance tone interval

Interval

Tone Tone

3. Set the input and output AC levels for each amplifier.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceAmplifierThresholds

a. The commissioned input and output threshold levels are displayed when the Thresholds menu
option is selected; see example below.
[Read] In(mV)=00000 Out(mV)=00000 SET
b. Select the “Read” menu option to display threshold levels being detected by the amplifier frame.
The VIPEDIA-12 presents the input and output AC levels based upon a fixed proportion of the
levels being detected. Automatic updates of these thresholds are made to the VIPEDIA-12 LCD
display after a short delay.
In ASL systems with appropriate surveillance tone level set on the output 1, the typical thresholds
values reported by the system are:
• Working amplifiers using DC surveillance with EOL10K resistors:
V400: Input Threshold = 200 to 250 mV / Output threshold = 600 to 900 mV 2
X400: Input Threshold = 230 to 290 mV / Output threshold = 600 to 900 mV2
• Working amplifiers using impedance monitoring (X400 only):
X400: Input Threshold = 230 to 290 mV / Output threshold = 600 to 1200 mV2, 3
• Working amplifiers using AC surveillance with AEL01 or ALE02 Active End of Line Devices:
V400: Input Threshold = 270 to 340 mV / Output threshold = 900 to 1350 mV2
X400: Input Threshold = 315 to 400 mV / Output threshold = 900 to 1350 mV2
• The standby amplifier uses an internal surveillance tone that is not user adjustable. Typical
thresholds are:
V400: Input Threshold = 00000 mV / Output threshold = 1323 mV
X400: Input Threshold = 350 mV / Output threshold = 920 mV
In order to use these readings as the threshold levels press the SELECT key – The readings will be
loaded into the input and output thresholds.

1
See Section ‘4.2.3.3.2 Configuring the Output Surveillance Tone’ (page 74)
2
Output threshold value depends on the actual load connected to the loudspeaker line
3
The surveillance tone may have to be increased up to 2 V RMS for stable impedance readings on low loads, typically below 25 W.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 43 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

c. The user can manually adjust the threshold levels using the arrow keys or the rotary switch if
required.
d. A “*” next to “SET” indicates that the displayed threshold levels are different from the currently
commissioned threshold levels.
e. Commission the input and output thresholds by selecting the “SET*” menu option and then pressing
the SELECT key.
Note that no action will be performed if the “SET” menu option is selected when a “*” is not
displayed next to it.
Any reduction from the commissioned threshold levels will be reported as a fault if the AC surveillance
is to be performed.

4.9.4.5 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance

The loudspeaker line surveillance is an essential function in Voice Alarms systems and can be accomplished
using DC Line Surveillance, AC Line Surveillance, or Impedance Monitoring:
• DC Line Surveillance: supported by V400 and X400
DC line surveillance requires all loudspeakers to be fitted with DC blocking capacitors, and one ASL
EOL10K End of Line Resistor in parallel with the terminations of the last physical loudspeaker of each
loudspeaker line. Any associated spurred cabling runs require additional EOL10K resistors to be fitted.
See Section “4.9.4.5.1 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using DC Surveillance (V400
and X400) ” (page 45).
• AC Line Surveillance: supported by V400 and X400
AC line surveillance requires one ASL AEL01 or AEL02 Active End of Line Device to be fitted at the end
on the loudspeaker circuit across the 100 V line.
The AEL01 and AEL02 enable line monitoring of either single (A) or dual A&B loudspeaker circuits
without the need for DC blocking capacitors in the loudspeakers. In dual A&B loudspeaker circuits
application the surveillance system identifies and isolates the faulty circuit in the event of short circuit.
See Section “4.9.4.5.2 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using AC Surveillance (V400
and X400) ” (page 45).
• Impedance Monitoring: supported by X400 only
Impedance Monitoring that does not require additional hardware to be fitted to loudspeakers or
loudspeaker lines; therefore, can be retrofitted to existing installation where it is not possible to modify
the installed loudspeakers.
Commissioning is described in Section “4.9.4.5.3 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance
Using Impedance Monitoring (X400 only) ” (page 48).
Loudspeaker line Earth Leakage monitoring is provided in addition to the above loudspeaker line
surveillance methods; see Section “4.9.4.6 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Earth Leakage Monitoring
(V400 and X400)” (page 50).

For EN 54-16, ISO 7240-16 and BS 5839-8 compliance and where the loudspeaker line
surveillance is required, one of the above line surveillance methods and the Earth Leakage
monitoring must be enabled and commissioned for all working amplifiers.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 44 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.9.4.5.1 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using DC Surveillance (V400 and
X400)
Open circuit and short circuit faults on loudspeaker lines are detected by the measurement of a small direct
current through ASL EOL10K End Of Line resistors. One EOL10K resistor is required in parallel with the
terminations of the last physical loudspeaker of each loudspeaker line. Any associated spurred cabling runs
require additional EOL10K resistors to be fitted. The system can monitor up to 10 spurs per amplifier slot:
• V400 Amplifier Frame: EOL10K resistors (spurs) must be equally split between the two circuits in dual
(A&B) circuit applications.
• X400 Amplifier Frame: Each circuit in multiple circuit configurations can have different number of
EOL10K resistors (or spurs) provided that the total number of EOL10K resistors (or spurs) per amplifier
slot does not exceed ten.
All loudspeakers connected to the system must be fitted with DC blocking capacitors.

To commission the DC line surveillance:

1. For X400 Amplifier Frame, ensure that the number of ganged slots and outputs is correctly configured
before commissioning the loudspeaker line monitoring; see Section “4.9.4.3 Configuring the Number of
Outputs Driven by an Amplifier (X400 only)” (page 39).
Notes:
The system may not be able to detect and isolate a line fault if the number of ganged slots or outputs is
incorrectly configured or modified after the loudspeaker line monitoring has been commissioned.
2. Set the loudspeaker line monitoring type to “DC Line” to enable the loudspeaker line monitoring using
DC surveillance.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceSpkr-lineType=DC Line

Possible values: “Not-Conf”, “DC Line”, “Impedance”, and “EOL AC Surv”


System default configuration: “Not-Conf”
• “Not-Conf”
The loudspeaker line monitoring method is not configured. Therefore, the loudspeaker line will not
be monitored for open and short circuit faults.
• “DC Line”
The loudspeaker line monitoring is carried out using DC surveillance with EOL10K resistor fitted at
the end of every spur on the loudspeaker circuit. The loudspeakers on the circuit are fitted with DC
blocking capacitors. An open or short circuit fault will be reported on any deviation from the
configured number of EOL10K resistors on the loudspeaker line.
• “EOL AC Surv”
The loudspeaker line monitoring is performed with one or two AEL01 or AEL02 units.
Refer to Section “4.9.4.5.2 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using AC
Surveillance (V400 and X400)” (page 45) for further details.
• “Impedance”
The loudspeaker line monitoring is carried out using Impedance monitoring.
Refer to Section “4.9.4.5.3 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using Impedance
Monitoring (X400 only)” (page 48) for further details.
3. The total number of EOL10K resistors currently commissioned is displayed.
4. Select the Read menu item.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 45 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5. The VIPEDIA-12 presents the number of EOL10K resistors currently being detected:
• V400 Amplifier Frame:

EOL-resistors=00

• X400 Amplifier Frame: the number of EOL10K resistors is shown for each of the ganged-slots.

[S#1=01] S#2=02 S#3=3 S#4=0

Notes:
1) S#1 displays the number of EOL resistors detected for the amplifier slot.
2) S#1 displays the number of EOL resistors detected for the amplifier slot.
3) S#2 to S#4 will only be displayed if the amplifier slot is ganged to adjacent slot(s). Section
“4.9.4.3 Configuring the Number of Outputs Driven by an Amplifier (X400 only)” (page 39).
describes the available hardware configuration options.
4) During normal operation with no faults, these readings should agree with the number of EOL10K
resistors actually fitted. If faults are present, then these readings will not necessarily agree with the
number of EOL10K resistors actually fitted. This can be because a short circuit has been detected
and the faulty outputs isolated as a result of the fault diagnostic process.
5) The automatic updates to the value displayed in the “Read” function occur at a slow rate of about
every 50 seconds.
6. To use these readings for configuration of the EOL10K resistors, press the SELECT key – The sum of
EOL10K resistors will be loaded into the “EOL-resistors” field.
It is possible to edit the number of EOL10K resistors as required.
• V400 Amplifier Frame: to edit, move to the “EOL-resistors” field and scroll it until the required value
is displayed.

Read [EOL-resistors=02] Outputs SET

• X400 Amplifier Frame: to edit, select the “Outputs” field.

Read EOL-resistors=02 [Outputs] SET

Note: The system will evenly distribute the number of EOL10K resistors detected by the “Read”
menu option for a given slot across the four outputs of that slot. Therefore, always use the
“Outputs” menu to set the actual number of EOL10K resistors fitted to each of the configured
outputs.
For each output fed by the amplifier, select the output and then configure the number of EOL10K
fitted to the output.

[O/P #01] EOL-resistors=02

Note: The outputs are sequentially numbered at the VIPEDIA-12 so that:


• “O/P #1” corresponds to “output A” of the first ganged slot
• “O/P #5” corresponds to “output A” of the second ganged slot (if any)
• “O/P #9” corresponds to “output A” of the third ganged slot (if any)
• “O/P #13” corresponds to “output A” of the fourth ganged slot (if any)
The EOL10L resistors do not need to be evenly distributed across the outputs, provided that
the total number of EOL10K resistors for one given slot does not exceed ten.
Accept the selected number of EOL10K resistors by pressing the SELECT key, or cancel by
pressing the BACK key.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 46 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

7. Commission the number of EOL10K resistors by selecting the “SET*” menu option and then pressing
the SELECT key.
Press the BACK key to cancel any changes.
Notes: A “*” next to “SET” indicates that the selected EOL10K resistor configuration is different from the
configuration currently commissioned.
Note that no action will be performed if the “SET” menu option is selected when a “*” is not
displayed next to it.

4.9.4.5.2 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using AC Surveillance (V400 and
X400)
The AEL01 and AEL02 Active End of Line Devices operate by utilising 30 Hz and 20 kHz surveillance tones
that are superimposed by the VIPEDIA-12 on its outputs. The AEL derives power from the 20 kHz
surveillance tone and monitors the line integrity by detecting the 30 Hz surveillance tone. On detection of the
30 Hz surveillance tone, the unit introduces a periodic signal current which the standard circuit within the
ASL amplifier systems unit can detect. If the 30 Hz tone is lost due to open or short circuit, then this periodic
signal disappears, and a line fault is reported. The earth monitoring circuit within the ASL amplifier system
can still detect “real” earth faults. The AEL device is fitted at the end on the loudspeaker circuit across the
100 V line, and with an additional connection to earth.

To commission the AC line surveillance:

1. Ensure that the 30 Hz and 20 kHz surveillance tones are correctly configured on the output feeding the
amplifier.
Notes:
The AEL units will not work if the surveillance tones are incorrectly configured.
2. For X400 Amplifier Frame, ensure that the number of ganged slots and outputs are correctly
commissioned as described in Section “4.9.4.3 Configuring the Number of Outputs Driven by an
Amplifier (X400 only)” (page 39).
Notes:
AC Line Monitoring with AEL01/AEL02 can only be used with 1-Output (single A circuit) and 2-Outputs
(dual A&B circuits) configurations.
3. Set the loudspeaker line monitoring type to “EOL AC Surv” to enable the loudspeaker line monitoring
using DC surveillance.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceSpkr-line


Type=EOL AC Surv

Possible values: “Not-Conf”, “DC Line”, “Impedance”, and “EOL AC Surv”


System default configuration: “Not-Conf”
• “Not-Conf”
The loudspeaker line monitoring method is not configured. Therefore, the loudspeaker line will not
be monitored for open and short circuit faults.
• “DC Line”
Refer to Section “4.9.4.5.1 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using DC
Surveillance (V400 and X400)” (page 45) for further details.
• “EOL AC Surv”
The loudspeaker line monitoring is performed with one or two AEL01 or AEL02 units as described
above.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 47 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

• “Impedance”
The loudspeaker line monitoring is carried out using Impedance monitoring.
Refer to Section “4.9.4.5.3 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using Impedance
Monitoring (X400 only)” (page 48) for further details.

4.9.4.5.3 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using Impedance Monitoring (X400
only)
From hardware Build Standard (BS) version 6 with firmware version V2.0 or later, the X400 supports
impedance monitoring of the loudspeaker circuits. The impedance monitoring confirms that the loudspeaker
circuit load remains within a tolerance window, reporting open or short circuit fault when the detected load is
outside the tolerance window.
The impedance monitoring is on a per slot basis as the X400 motherboard hardware allows voltage and
current readings to be taken on a per slot basis. Therefore, the monitored impedance is an aggregate of all
connected loads on all four outputs of a given slot.
The tolerance window is configurable between 5% to 25%. When the detected load is outside the tolerance
window, the system starts a fault diagnostic process using a continuous 30 Hz surveillance tone so that
spurious faults due to noise can be filtered out. If the impedance changes to a value above the threshold, a
line open circuit fault will be reported. If the impedance falls below the threshold, a line short circuit fault will
be reported. Fault is reported within 100 seconds of the fault being induced.

To commission the impedance monitoring line surveillance:

1. Ensure that the 30 Hz surveillance tone is correctly configured on the output feeding the amplifier.
Notes:
Impedance monitoring may not work properly if the surveillance tone is incorrectly configured.
2. Ensure that the number of ganged slots and outputs is correctly configured before commissioning the
loudspeaker line monitoring; see Section “4.9.4.3 Configuring the Number of Outputs Driven by an
Amplifier (X400 only)” (page 39).
Notes:
The system may not be able to detect and isolate a line fault if the number of ganged slots or outputs is
incorrectly configured or modified after the loudspeaker line monitoring has been commissioned.
3. Set the loudspeaker line monitoring type to “EOL AC Surv” to enable the loudspeaker line monitoring
using DC surveillance.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceSpkr-line


Type=Impedance

Possible values: “Not-Conf”, “DC Line”, “Impedance”, and “EOL AC Surv”


System default configuration: “Not-Conf”
• “Not-Conf”
The loudspeaker line monitoring method is not configured. Therefore, the loudspeaker line will not
be monitored for open and short circuit faults.
• “DC Line”
Refer to Section “4.9.4.5.1 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using DC
Surveillance (V400 and X400)” (page 45) for further details.
• “EOL AC Surv”
Refer to Section “4.9.4.5.2 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Surveillance Using AC
Surveillance (V400 and X400)” (page 45) for further details.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 48 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

• “Impedance”
The loudspeaker line monitoring is carried out using Impedance monitoring.
The impedance monitoring is on a per slot basis; thus the monitored impedance is an aggregate of
all connected loads on all four outputs of a given slot.
If the impedance changes to a value above the threshold, a line open circuit fault will be reported. If
the impedance falls below the threshold, a line short circuit fault will be reported. Fault is reported
within 100 seconds of the fault being induced.
4. Set the reference impedance and the tolerance window for all ganged slots.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceSpkr-line


Type=Impedance

a. The total impedance currently commissioned is displayed when the “Type=Impedance” menu option
is selected; see example below.

[Read] Impedance=0000 Slots SET

The “Impedance” field is a display only field showing the total parallel impedance configured for the
ganged slots, i.e. the total impedance configured via the “Read” or “Slots” menu option. The system
automatically updates this field when the configuration is changed via the “Read” or “Outputs” menu
option.
Notes:

The impedance commissioning menu above will not be displayed if the impedance monitoring
calibration data is lost – The impedance calibration menu will be displayed instead, as shown
below.
[Read] SET

Should recalibration be needed, please contact ASL for instructions.

b. The “Read” function shows the impedance currently being read for each of the ganged slots and is
intended as a check during the commissioning; see example below.

[Impedance 98 99 100 99]

S#4
S#3
S#2
S#1

In order to use these readings for configuration of the tolerance window press the SELECT key –
The total impedance will be loaded into the “Impedance” field. Each individual reading will be loaded
into the corresponding slot, which can be accessed via the “Slots” menu option.
Notes:

1) S#1 displays the impedance detected for the amplifier slot.

2) S#2 to S#4 will only be displayed if the amplifier slot is ganged to adjacent slot(s). See Table 5
(page 40) and Figure 14 (page 41) for available hardware configuration options.

3) Because the system uses a 30 Hz surveillance tone to measure the impedance, the impedance
measured by the system will typically be lower than that based on the loudspeaker
specification, which is generally specified at 1 kHz.

4) All loudspeakers connected to the system should NOT be fitted with DC blocking capacitors as
they affect the impedance readings.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 49 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

c. Select the “Slots” menu option to configure the tolerance window for each slot and adjust the
reference impedance if required.
Notes:

1) The tolerance window should be configured according to the actual load connected to each slot,
and in principle could enable the system to detect the failure of a single loudspeaker. For
example:
a) One 100 W amplifier feeding 10 x 10 W loudspeakers connected to a single slot: a 10%
tolerance window would be required to detect the failure of a single loudspeaker.
b) One 100 W amplifier feeding two ganged slots where 5 x 10 W loudspeakers are
connected to one slot, and 5 x 10 W loudspeakers are connected to the second slot: a
20% tolerance window would be required on each slot to detect the failure of a single
loudspeaker.

2) For correct operation of the impedance monitoring, all slots configured for an amplifier should
have load connected.

3) In practice, it is generally not possible to set windows sufficiently tight to detect individual
loudspeaker failure because temperature effects will cause a natural variation

d. A “*” next to “SET” indicates that impedance and/or window settings are different from the
configuration currently configured.

e. Commission the impedance and window by selecting the “SET*” menu option and then pressing the
SELECT key.
Note that no action will be performed if the “SET” menu option is selected when a “*” is not
displayed next to it.

4.9.4.6 Commissioning the Loudspeaker Line Earth Leakage Monitoring (V400 and X400)

Both loudspeaker line phase conductors can be monitored for resistance to earth. No current flows to earth
when the loudspeaker wiring is intact. Current will flow when the loudspeaker wiring is faulty or there is
ingress of water.
When the Earth Leakage monitoring is enabled, an earth leakage fault will be reported when the measured
resistance is below the threshold value (50 kΩ). This value allows minimal water ingress to be tolerated,
minimising “nuisance” fault reports.

For EN 54-16 and BS 5839-8 compliance and where the loudspeaker line surveillance, the Earth
Leakage monitoring must be enabled for all working amplifiers.

Menu: ConfigurationFramesFrame #nnSlot #nnSurveillanceSpkr-lineEarthSurveyed

Possible values: “Not Surv”, “Surveyed”


System default configuration: “Surveyed”
• “Not Surv”
The earth leakage resistance will not be monitored. Therefore, no earth leakage fault will be reported.
• “Surveyed”
The earth leakage monitoring is enabled.
Both loudspeaker line phase conductors are monitored for resistance to earth. An earth leakage fault will
be reported when the measured resistance is below the threshold value.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 50 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10 Fault Monitoring


Active faults and the fault logs can be viewed on the LCD display. Active faults can be accepted and cleared
through the front panel FAULT ACCEPT and FAULT CLEAR keys.
All VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units display fault count summaries from all other VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units in
the PA/VA system and the detailed report of local faults:
• The top-level fault display provides a fault summary of the PA/VA system; see example in Figure 16
(page 51).
The top line displays the unit name as defined in the PAVA SCT configuration.
The bottom line displays the overall fault status of the system:
− The fault count indicates the number of faults present in the system and it may be preceded by one
or two exclamation marks as described in Figure 16 (page 51).
− If a power, fuse, path, or earth fault is reported that affects the Voice Alarm system, the appropriate
text will be displayed flashing (POWER, FUSE, PATH and/or EARTH) on the bottom line.
• The FaultsActive menu option lists the current active local faults in detail; see examples in Figure 17
(page 53).
• The FaultsSummary menu option provides an overview of the fault status of each VIPEDIA-
12/INTEGRA unit in the PA/VA system. It also indicates whether a VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA unit is offline
and whether its PAVA SCT system configuration is same as the local system configuration.

Figure 16 Top-level fault display example

THIS UNIT’S NAME 11:33:28


!!FAULTS 2/5/0 POWER FUSE PATH EARTH

EN 54 -16 faults: They indicate a power,


fuse, path, or earth fault has been reported
in the PA/VA system that affects the Voice
Alarm system.

• Third number:
This is the total number of VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers that are offline; see
which units are offline via Faults>Summary.
VIPxxx and FRMxxx OFF LINE faults are not included in the fault count.
• Second number:
This is the total number of faults present in the PA/VA cluster; see faults status of
each VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router via Faults>Summary.
• First number:
This is the total number of local faults; see fault list via Faults>Active.

Second exclamation mark (!): It indicates that a comms fault with a peripheral (microphone, BMB01 and
V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame) that is attached to this unit has been reported.
Note that the comms fault exclamation mark is not latched.

First exclamation mark (!): It indicates a critical fault within this unit or in its DBB connection.
The following fault can drive the critical fault exclamation mark:
• Static configuration fault
• DSP/FPGA faults
• Memory and processor faults
• Any Network Card fault
• DBB faults (audio or Ethernet)
The critical fault exclamation mark is latched for all faults except for the DBB Ethernet fault.

These indications do not propagate do other units in system.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 51 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

When a fault is detected locally or on any other VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA in the PA/VA system, the front panel
“fault” LED flashes, the built-in loudspeaker emits an alarm tone and the top-level fault status summary
overlaps the current menu selection.
The top-level fault status summary will persist until a user presses any key on the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA
front panel, when the previous menu text will be restored.

Notes:

a) The built-in loudspeaker will only emit an alarm tone for a fault event if the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA is
configured as Fault Master.
b) NA

If a fault is triggered by a failure of any processor or memory, critical to the Voice Alarm system, including
those of the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA itself, the front panel “system fault” LED illuminates. A communication
fault between the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA and any equipment or device that has been configured at the
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA and that is critical to Voice Alarm functions will also trigger a system fault. A system
fault requires immediate action as part(s) of the system used for emergency functions may have been
affected. A system fault will always cause the “fault” LED to be lit as well.
The bottom line of the top-level fault status display also displays the appropriate text (POWER, EARTH,
FUSE and/or PATH) if the detected fault is a power, earth, fuse or path fault reported that affects the Voice
Alarm system; see Figure 16 (page 51).

Notes:

a) EN 54-16 fault indications (“system fault” LED and POWER, EARTH, FUSE and PATH faults) are
generated from local faults and the shared with other units in the PA/VA system. This means that every
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA will display the PA/VA system overall EN 54 fault status.
b) NA

Faults are time and date stamped as they occur and can be individually viewed in the active fault list.
Multiple faults can be examined by scrolling through the list by means of the front panel switches or rotary
knob; see Section “4.10.1 Viewing the Active Fault List” (page 53).
The “fault” LED can be steadied and the alarm sounder muted by pressing the front panel FAULT ACCEPT
key; see Section “4.10.3 Accepting Faults” (page 54).
Newly occurring faults cause the sounder to resume operation, the “fault” LED to resume flashing, the
“system fault” LED to illuminate for any of the above system faults, and the bottom line of the top-level fault
status display to show the appropriated text as described above.
Once a fault is physically fixed it is still latched on the LCD display. It is removed from the latched display by
pressing the front panel FAULT CLEAR key; see Section “4.10.4 Clear” (page 55). If a fault cleared in this
way still persists, then the fault warning condition will be restored within 100 seconds.
Pressing the FAULT CLEAR key also releases any active amplifier standby switchover to reset the system
to a known state.

Notes:

a) “fault” and “system fault” LEDs and Active Fault list are available on MPS/EMS microphones connected
to any VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA unit in the system. The MPS/EMS microphones will provide the same fault
information as the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA that they connect to.
b) Faults can also be accepted from any MPS/EMS microphones.
c) Faults can also be cleared from an EMS microphone that is connected to a Fault Master.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 52 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

d) Faults can also be cleared from a switched MPS microphone that is connected to a Fault Master and
with keyswitch in the on position.
e) FAULT ACCEPT and FAULT CLEAR from the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA’s front panel, MPS/EMS
microphone or software tools such as the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool are system wide in
operation, i.e., accepting or clearing faults from one unit will accept and clear faults on all units in the
PA/VA system.

4.10.1 Viewing the Active Fault List (Local Faults)

To view the active fault list:

1. Select FaultsActive.
2. The active fault list will be displayed; see examples in Figure 17 (page 53).
3. Use the up and down arrows or the rotary knob to scroll the fault list.

Figure 17 Active fault list examples

Total number of faults

001= Most recent fault

Example 1: No faults in the PA/VA system Example 2: Faults present

FAULT STATUS (/) 000/000 FAULT STATUS (/) 001/010


NO ACTIVE FAULTS 12Jul2018 16:10 IP03 AUDIO INPUT

4.10.2 Viewing the Summary of Faults on Remote Units

To view the summary of faults on remote units:

1. Select FaultsSummary.
2. A list of all VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers in the PA/VA system will be displayed.
See examples of fault display in Figure 18 (page 54).
3. Use the up and down arrows or the rotary knob to scroll the list.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 53 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 18 Summary of faults on remote units (examples for Vipedia 1 front panel)

001= First VIPEDIA-12 or INTEGRA Router in the


PAVA SCT system configuration

Total number of VIPEDIA-12 and INTEGRA Routers


in the PA/VA cluster

Example 1: Vipedia 1 has 3 faults and its system


FAULT STATUS (/) 001/017 configuration mismatches the system configuration on 2 units
in the PA/VA cluster (“Cfg Mismatch” will be displayed for
Vipedia 01: 3 faults mismatches 2
each of them; see Examples 5 and 6).

Unit ID of the VIPEDIA-12 or INTEGRA

All VIPEDIA-12 and INTEGRA Routers are


identified as “Vipedia”.

Example 2: Vipedia 3 has 2 faults, and one (or both) of Example 3: Vipedia 5 has one fault and it is a microphone
them is a critical fault (first exclamation mark !). or BMB01 comms fault (second exclamation mark !).

FAULT STATUS (/) 003/017 FAULT STATUS (/) 005/017


! Vipedia 03: 2 faults !Vipedia 05: 1 faults

Example 4: Vipedia 8 is offline. Example 5: Vipedia 10 has 4 faults and Vipedia 1 reports
that their system configurations do not match.

FAULT STATUS (/) 008/017 FAULT STATUS (/) 010/017


Vipedia 08 Offline Vipedia 10: 4 faults Cfg Mismatch

Example 6: Vipedia 11 has 5 faults and Vipedia 1 reports Example 7: Vipedia 17 has no faults.
that their system configurations do not match.

FAULT STATUS (/) 011/017 FAULT STATUS (/) 017/017


Vipedia 11: 5 faults Cfg Mismatch Vipedia 17: 0 fault

4.10.3 Accepting Faults

Notes:

a) FAULT ACCEPT is a system wide function. This means that accepting local faults will also accept all
active faults in all other VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units in the PA/VA system.
b) NA

To accept faults:

1. Press the FAULT ACCEPT key on the front panel.


2. All active faults will be accepted (acknowledged), the “fault” LED steadied, and the alarm sounder
muted.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 54 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.4 Clearing Faults

Notes:

a) FAULT CLEAR is a system wide function. This means that clearing local faults will also clear all active
faults in all other VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units in the PA/VA system. If a fault cleared in this way still
persists, then the fault warning condition will be restored within 100 seconds.
b) NA

To clear faults:

1. Log on with Access Level 2 (or Access Level 3) access code via ConfigurationAccess menu option
if not already done.
2. Press the FAULT CLEAR key on the front panel.
3. All faults will be cleared, setting the VIPEDIA-12 and all connected equipment to the 'no faults' state.
Any amplifier changeovers in effect will also be cancelled.

4.10.5 Router Fault Log

The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router maintains a time-stamped 500-event fault log in non-volatile memory, this
include powering up, fault acceptance and clearance, and user logging in and out times.
To prevent intermittent or frequently recurring faults from rapidly causing excessive write operations to the
memory, faults are latched so that a recurring fault is logged in its first instance, and thereafter any
repetitions are not recorded, unless a physical manual fault “clear” has taken place.
The fault log is continuously checked, and, if it is found to be corrupted, it is erased and a new “LOG
CLEARED” fault is logged. A manual fault log clearing function is also provided.
Note that all V400 frame-specific faults are logged in separate frame fault logs which is retained by each
V400 Amplifier Frame in the system. These faults will also be stored in the system fault log retained by the
VIPEDIA-12 Router. The V400 frame fault log is also accessible from the VIPEDIA-12 front panel.

To view the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA fault log:

1. Select FaultsLogRouter.
2. The fault log will be displayed; see examples in Figure 19 (page 55).

Figure 19 VIPEDIA-12 fault log example

0001= Most recent fault

Total number of faults (maximum of 0500)

Example 1 Example 2

SYSTEM FAULT LOG (/) 0001/0100 SYSTEM FAULT LOG (/) 0005/0100
26Jul2018 15:10 IP01 AUDIO INPUT FAULTS ACCEPTED

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 55 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Notes:

a) Non-fault events in the system fault log:


• D_CONFIG UPDATE
• DSP UPDATE
• FAULTS ACCEPTED
• FAULTS CLEARED
• FPGA UPDATE
• LOG CLEARED
• LOG OFF
• LOG ON
• POWERED UP
• REDUNDANT ACTIVE
• REDUNDANT PASSIVE
• S_CONFIG UPDATE
b) NA

To clear the VIPEDIA-12 fault log:

1. Select FaultsFault LogsClear Router Log.


2. The history of the last 500 records is cleared and a new fault “LOG CLEARED” is logged; see Figure 20
(page 56).

Figure 20 Fault log cleared

SYSTEM FAULT LOG (/) 0001/0001


13Jul2015 LOG CLEARED

4.10.6 V400 Frame Fault Log

All amplifier frame-specific faults are logged on a fault log retained by each V400 frame.
To prevent intermittent or frequently recurring faults from rapidly causing excessive write operations to the
memory, faults are latched so that a recurring fault is logged in its first instance, and thereafter any
repetitions are not recorded, unless a physical manual fault “clear” has taken place.

Notes:

a) The fault log is only available for the V400 Amplifier Frame at the time of publication of this document.
b) NA

To view a V400 frame fault log:

1. Select FaultsLogFrame #nn.


2. The fault log for the selected frame will be displayed; see examples in Figure 21 (page 57).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 56 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 21 V400 frame fault log example

001= Most recent fault

Total number of faults

Example 1 Example 2

FRAME FAULT LOT (/) 010/200 FRAME FAULT LOT (/) 000/000
20May2018 19:10 F01/1 AMP AUDIO INPUT FRAME LOG IS EMPTY

4.10.7 Viewing Fault Status of X400 Outputs

The X400 Amplifier Frame features 16 relay isolated outputs to enable multiple small speaker runs to be fed
from single amplifiers. The X400 is fully configurable in terms of the mapping of the amplifiers to the outputs.
For example, 4 amplifiers may be fitted, each feeding 4 outputs. Alternatively, a single amplifier may be fitted
feeding up to 16 outputs. Loudspeaker line faults reported to the VIPEDIA-12 identifies the amplifier feeding
these outputs. The faulty outputs may be identified through the VIPEDIA-12 front panel display.

To view fault status of the X400 outputs:

1. Select ConfigurationFrames ViewFaulty O/PsFrame #nn.


2. The fault status of all 16 outputs of the selected X400 is displayed.
SLOT 2 SLOT 3
A B C D A B C D
Where:
‘1’: faulty
‘0’: unknown
[1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0]

A B C D A B C D
SLOT 1 SLOT3

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 57 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.8 Fault Codes and Suggested Actions

The fault codes described here are correct for the current version of the VIPEDIA-12 at the time of the publication of this document (Host CP V3.3.0.2).
If the VIPEDIA-12 in your system has a later (or earlier) version of software, then it may mean that some of the fault codes may be subtly different from the fault code
described here, or that the new fault codes have been added.
If any difficulties are encountered, contact ASL or an appointed ASL distributor, quoting the equipment Build Standard and software version of your VIPEDIA-12 unit;
see Sections “6.2.1 Build Standard and Software Versions” (page 159) and “4.8.5 Verifying the Software Version” (page 32).

4.10.8.1 VIPEDIA-12 Faults

Table 6 VIPEDIA-12 faults

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
*CPU RESET ON - Indicates an unexpected control A one of occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
processor reset (i.e. reset without power or transients. Repeated occurrences indicate faulty
cycling). electronics.
The VIPEDIA-12 will enter safe state (unrecoverable
INTERNAL ERROR) after 3 resets within 1 hour of
each other.
Clear faults.
If the error persists, power cycle the unit.
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
*DSP COMMS RESET ON - The VIPEDIA-12 reset due to DSP Clear faults.
comms fault (e.g. corrupted flash). If the error persists, reload the DSP; see Section
“6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET
Firmware” (page 160).
If the error persists, reload the DVAs; see Section
“5.6 Loading DVA Messages” (page 150).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
*FIRMWARE UPDATE - - The VIPEDIA-12 was reset by the Clear faults.
firmware load application.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 58 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
*S-CONFIG LOAD RESET - - The VIPEDIA-12 reset due to Check the VIPEDIA-12 (configuration size may be too
unrecoverable problem when loading the large due to excessive number of CAE effect events
PAVA SCT system configuration. and/or microphone buttons).
Load the PAVA SCT system configuration into all
units in the PA/VA system; refer to the PAVA System
Configuration Tool User’s Manual (see Table 21 on
page 175).
If the error persists, contact ASL.
*USER RESET - - The VIPEDIA-12 was reset by the user or Clear faults.
a tool (for example, after loading the
DSP/FGPA).
12V RAIL-1 FAULT OFF POWER Indicates an internal supply voltage out of Replace the VIPEDIA-12.
12V RAIL-2 FAULT tolerance.
1V8 RAIL FAULT
1V2 RAIL FAULT
3V3 RAIL FAULT
5V BYPASS RAIL FAULT
5V RAIL FAULT
AVCC RAIL FAULT
DSP VOLTAGE FAULT
MIC VOLTAGE FAULT
PHANTOM POWER FAULT
24V SUPPLY-1 FAULT OFF POWER Indicates that the power supply inputs is Check the power supply to the unit.
24V SUPPLY-2 FAULT out of tolerance (18 V to 40 V).
CAN COMMS FAULT ON - External CAN bus fault Check CAN wiring between VIPEDIA-12 and frames.
CHECKSUM FAILED ON - Indicates that the Host CP code is invalid. Download the Host CP code; refer to Section
“6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET
Firmware” (page 160) for further details.
DANTE AUDIO CLOCK ON - VIPEDIA-12 not detecting the Dante clock Clear faults.
from its Network Card. If the error persists, power cycle the unit.
The Dante module and/or Network Card If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
may have reset or is faulty.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 59 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
DBB AUDIO FAULT ON - Indicates a fault in the DBB IN (digital Check the DBB connection to the VIPEDIA-12 unit.
audio backbone input) connection of the
unit.
DBB ETHERNET COMMS ON PATH Indicates that the DBB member lost Check the Ethernet connection between the
FAULT Ethernet connection to one or more VIPEDIA-12 units in the DBB group.
VIPEDA-12 units in the same DBB group.
DSP CLOCK ON - VIPEDIA-12 not detecting an internal Clear faults.
clock. If the error persists, power cycle the unit.
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
DSP COMMS FAULT ON - Communication failure with the router Reload the DSP; see Section “6.2.4 Loading the
audio processor (DSP) VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET Firmware”
(page 160).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
DSP/FPGA LOAD FAULT ON - Indicates that an error in the DSP/FPGA Load the DSP and FPGA; see Section “6.2.4 Loading
images forced the external flash to be the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET Firmware”
cleared. (page 160).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
DVA MISSING/REQUESTED ON - Indicates that one or more DVAs are Re-load the DVA messages; see Section
DVA NOT FOUND corrupted. “5.6 Loading DVA Messages” (page 150).
ETHERNET COMMS FAULT ON PATH Indicates that the VIPEDIA-12 lost Check the Ethernet connection.
Ethernet connection to all VIPEDIA-12s in
the same PA/VA system.
ETHERNET STARTUP FAULT ON - Indicates that an error was detected Check the IP settings are set with valid and correct
during the initialisation of the Ethernet values.
device and connection Power cycle the unit.
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
FPGA FAULT ON - Indicates a fault is present in the router Power cycle the unit.
digital audio backbone (DBB). If the error persists, reload the FPGA; see Section
“6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET
Firmware” (page 160).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 60 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
FRMxxx CFG MISMATCH OFF - It indicates that there is a configuration Load the PAVA SCT system configuration into all
mismatch between the VIPEDIA-12 and units in the PA/VA system; refer to the PAVA System
the Amplifier Frame. Configuration Tool User’s Manual (see Table 21 on
page 175).
GPS COMMS FAULT ON - Indicates the VIPEDIA-12 has a problem Check connection between the GPS device and the
communicating with the GPS time source VIPEDIA-12.
device Check GPS device.
Replace GPS device.
HCP COMMS FAULT ON - Indicates the VIPEDIA-12 has a problem Check HCP Host and connection between Host and
communicating with the HCP host. VIPEDIA-12 serial port.
INCOMPATIBLE CFG FILES - Incompatibiliy between the XML and Load the PAVA SCT system configuration into all
binary configuration files units in the PA/VA system; refer to the PAVA System
Configuration Tool User’s Manual (see Table 21 on
page 175).
INTERNAL ERROR ON - Indicates an internal software error. Power cycle the unit.
If the error persists, reload the PAVA SCT system
configuration into the unit; refer to the PAVA System
Configuration Tool User’s Manual (see Table 21 on
page 175).
If the error persists, reload the software package
(Host CP, DSP and FPGA); see Section
“6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET
Firmware” (page 160).
Reload the PAVA SCT system configuration into the
unit; refer to the PAVA System Configuration Tool
User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175).
If the error persists, reload the DVAs; see Section
“5.6 Loading DVA Messages” (page 150).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
MAJOR FAULT ON RDC A - - Major fault(s) present on unit A of the Check the Active Fault list of the unit A of the
redundant pair. redundant pair to determine the fault(s).
(only on VIPEDIA-12 units configured as Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration
an AS Redundant system) Guide (U-0641-3090) for further details.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 61 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
MAJOR FAULT ON RDC B - - Major fault(s) present on unit B of the Check the Active Fault list of the unit A of the
redundant pair. redundant pair to determine the fault(s).
(only on VIPEDIA-12 units configured as Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration
an AS Redundant system) Guide (U-0641-3090) for further details.
MEMORY CARD FAULT ON - Micro-SD card fault Replace the Micro-SD card.
MINOR FAULT ON RDC A - - Minor fault(s) present on unit A of the Check the Active Fault list of the unit A of the
redundant pair. redundant pair to determine the fault(s).
(only on VIPEDIA-12 units configured as Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration
an AS Redundant system) Guide (U-0641-3090) for further details.
MINOR FAULT ON RDC B - - Minor fault(s) present on unit B of the Check the Active Fault list of the unit A of the
redundant pair. redundant pair to determine the fault(s).
(only on VIPEDIA-12 units configured as Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration
an AS Redundant system) Guide (U-0641-3090) for further details.
NETCARD AUDIO CLOCK - PATH VIPEDIA-12 not detecting clock from its Clear faults.
Network Card. If the error persists, power cycle the unit.
The Network Card may have reset or is If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
faulty.
NETCARD CF MISMATCH OFF - It indicates that the Network Card system Clear faults.
configuration does not match the If the fault persists, reload the PAVA SCT system
VIPEDIA-12’s system configuration. configuration into the VIPEDIA-12 (it will automatically
load the system configuration into the Network Card);
refer to the PAVA System Configuration Tool User’s
Manual (see Table 21 on page 175).
NO LEARN FAULT OFF - Indicates that the “Learn” function hasn’t Perform “Learn’ function to detect connected amplifier
been performed frames or suppress the fault if no frames are
connected to the VIPEDIA-12.
NVM DEFAULTS SET FAULT ON - Indicates that the dynamic configuration Re-configure the unit ID/Name, Frame Learn Check,
(audio settings, surveillance settings, unit UTC offset (if used) and users’ access codes from the
ID, etc.) has been reset. front panel menu options:
• Unit ID: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit
IdentityId
• Frame Learn Check fault:
FaultsSystemLearn Check

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 62 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
• UTC offset:
ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit
IdentityUTC offset
• Users’ PIN:
ConfigurationAccessChange-PIN
Load the audio settings into the unit using the Audio
Settings Manager; see Section “5.5 Extracting and
Injecting Audio Settings to/from a File” (page 147). If
a copy of the dynamic configuration is not available,
re-commission the audio settings
NVM FAULT ON - Indicates a fault in the non-volatile Power cycle the unit.
memory (NVM). If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
RDC OVERRIDE OFF - It indicates that the Vipedia unit has Press the OVERRIDE button on the activated RCB01
activated the RCB01 and removed the to power up the faulty Vipedia.
power from the other Vipedia in the Check the fault log to determine the cause of the
redundant pair. power down.
(only on VIPEDIA-12 units configured as Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration
an AS Redundant system) Guide (U-0641-3090) for further details.
REDUNDANT D-CFG OFF - It indicates that the dynamic Load the correct dynamic configuration into both units
MISMATCH configurations of the redundant pair do in the pair.
not match. Refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration
(only on VIPEDIA-12 units configured as Guide (U-0641-3090) for further details.
an AS Redundant system)
STATIC CONFIG FAULT ON - Indicates that the unit has not been Load the PAVA SCT system configuration into the
configured or that the static configuration unit; refer to the PAVA System Configuration Tool
is not valid. User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175).
TFTP ERROR ON - File transfer error fault. Check the IP address settings are correct both on the
Indicates a connection error during configuration PC and VIPEDIA-12 unit and repeat the
firmware download. firmware upload.
Refer to Section “6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and
VIPEDIA-NET Firmware” (page 160) for further
details.
UIP COMMS FAULT ON - Communication failure with the user Replace the VIPEDIA-12.
interface processor (UIP)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 63 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)

VIPEDIA CFG MISMATCH OFF - It indicates that there is a configuration Load the PAVA SCT system configuration into all
mismatch between the VIPEDIA-12 and units in the PA/VA system; refer to the PAVA System
one or more units in the PA/VA system. Configuration Tool User’s Manual (see Table 21 on
See mismatching units via front panel page 175).
Faults>Summary menu option.
VIPEDIA-DSP LOAD FAULT ON - Indicates an internal error. Power cycle the unit.
If the error persists, load the DSP; see Section
“6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET
Firmware” (page 160).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
VIPEDIA-DSP RESET FAULT ON - Indicates an internal error. Clear faults.
If the error persists, power cycle the unit.
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
VIPxxx OFFLINE ON - Indicates that the VIPEDIA-12 lost Check the Ethernet connection between the
Ethernet connection to the VIPxxx VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers.
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router. If VIP000 OFFLINE, then ensure the config has been
Notes: applied to all units.
a) This fault is not included in the fault
count on the diplay top line.
b) NA
WATCHDOG STATUS FAULT ON - Indicates that the watchdog may not be Power cycle the unit.
working correctly. If the error persists, reload the software package
(Host CP, DSP and FPGA); see Section
“6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET
Firmware” (page 160).
Reload the PAVA SCT system configuration into the
unit; refer to the PAVA System Configuration Tool
User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175).
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 64 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)

Notes:
a) The following events are logged in the fault log. They may not be present in the ACTIVE FAULT list:
• D_CONFIG UPDATE: indicates that the dynamic configuration has been updated (via Commit System Settings).
• DSP UPDATE: indicates that the DSP has been updated.
• FAULTS ACCEPTED: indicates that faults have been accepted.
• FAULTS CLEARED: indicates that faults have been cleared.
• FPGA UPDATE: indicates that the FPGA has been updated.
• LOG OFF: indicates that the user has logged off.
• LOG ON: indicates that the user has logged on.
• FIRMWARE UPDATE: indicates that the main firmware of the VIPEDIA-12 has been updated.
• LOG CLEARED: indicates the fault log has been cleared.
• POWERED UP: indicates that the unit has been powered up.
• REDUNDANT ACTIVE: indicates that the standby unit in the redundant pair changed over to be the active unit.
• REDUNDANT PASSIVE: indicates that the active unit in the redundant pair changed over to be the standby unit
• S_CONFIG UPDATE: indicates that the static configuration (i.e. the PAVA SCT configuration) has been updated.
• S-CONFIG LOAD RESET: indicates that the VIPEDIA-12 reset during configuration load due to unexpected errors or timeout.
• USER RESET: indicates that the VIPEDIA-12 has been reset by the user or a tool (e.g. after DSP/FPGA firmware update).
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 65 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.8.2 VIPEDIA-NET Network Card Faults

Table 7 VIPEDIA-NET Network Card faults

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
VNET BASE VIP OFFLINE ON PATH Indicates that the Network Card has Check that the Network Card is configured on
VNET LINK FAULT 1:0 problems communicating with the VIPEDIA-12 unit.
VIPEDIA-12 unit. This is expected after Check that the Network Card is correctly configured.
downloading firmware to the VIPEDIA-12 Clear faults.
unit.
If the error persists, power cycle the VIPEDIA-12 unit.
VNET OFFLINE FAULT ON PATH Indicates that the VIPEDIA-12 unit has Check that the Network Card is correctly configured.
problem communicating with the Network If the error persists, power cycle the VIPEDIA-12 unit.
Card. If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
VNET NETWORK FAULT 1:y OFF PATH Ethernet port y not connected • Ethernet Port y not connected (x=0, 3, 4, 5 and 6,
The Status tree on the VCT provides where 0 is the internal port).
more details of the fault. Check the port connection including the cabling.
• The SFP module on Port y missing or
incompatible (x=5 or 6).
Check the SFP module on Port y.
VNET STORAGE FAULT 3:y OFF - Configuration file y in /dva/config is Reload the VCT configuration.
missing or corrupt, where y:
0: MD5SUMS-config
2: CurrentConfig.cfg
3: vipediad.xml
4: vipedia-fault-d.xml
5: announce-d.xml
6: aslmicd.xml
7: aslmic-announce-if-d.xml
The Status tree on the VCT provides
more details of the fault.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 66 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
VNET STORAGE FAULT 4:y OFF - Application file y in /dva/bin is missing or Reload the Network Card firmware.
corrupt, where y: Refer to Section “6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and
1: MD5SUMS-config VIPEDIA-NET Firmware” (page 160) for further
8: vipedia-d details.
9: vipedia-fault-d
10: announce-d
11: aslmicd
12: aslmic-announce-if-d
13: asl-pcdva-oem-telnet
14: file-index-d
15: file-sync-d
16: vipet_setup
VNET AUDIO FAULT X:Y OFF - Errors detected in the audio channels Power cycle the unit.
between the VIPEDIA-12 and its Network If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.
Card.
X: identifies the audio path:
• 0 indicates errors in the channels
used by Vipedia routes.
• 1: indicates errors in the channels
used by VIPA routes.
Y: always 0.
VNET MEMORY FAULT 3:0 OFF - Site-specific configuration data in Load the PAVA SCT and VCT configuration.
memory is corrupt. If the error persists, power cycle the VIPEDIA-12 unit.
If the error persists, replace the VIPEDIA-12.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 67 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.8.3 V400 and X400 Frame and Amplifier Faults

Table 8 V400 and X400 Frame and amplifier faults

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
FRxx AMPy CPU-MEMORY ON - Surveillance interface CPU memory Suspect Surveillance Interface electronics.
xx= Frame Address Replace the Surveillance Interface card.
y=Slot Number
FRxx AMPy CPU-RESET ON - Surveillance interface CPU reset A one of occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
xx= Frame Address or transients. Repeated occurrences indicate faulty
y=Slot Number electronics.
Replace the amplifier frame.
FRxx AMPy FAIL OFF - Amplifier failure Indicates faulty amplifier module.
xx= Frame Address Replace the amplifier module.
y=Slot Number
FRxx AMPy IF-COMMS ON - Cannot communicate with surveillance Check whether the Surveillance Interface or its
xx= Frame Address interface amplifier module has been removed. If all seems ok
y=Slot Number then the surveillance card electronics should be
suspected.
Replace the Surveillance Interface card.
FRxx AMPy IF-WRONG OFF - Different surveillance interface or Indicates that the Amplifier or Surveillance Interface
xx= Frame Address amplifier fitted from that commissioned have been changed to different type from that learnt.
y=Slot Number
FRxx AMPy INPUT OFF - Loss of audio at input Check cabling from the VIPEDIA-12 to the input of the
xx= Frame Address amplifier surveillance interface.
y=Slot Number
FRxx AMPy LINE-EARTH OFF EARTH Earth leakage fault Indicates an earth leakage path of <50kΩ exists
xx= Frame Address between either conductor of the speaker circuit and
y=Slot Number ground.
Speaker wiring and loudspeakers need to be
checked.
FRxx AMPy LINE-OPEN OFF - Open circuit line fault DC line monitoring: one or more spurs have been lost
xx= Frame Address from the commissioned setting.
y=Slot Number AC line monitoring: monitoring signal is not being
detected indicating an open circuit.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 68 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
Impedance monitoring: detected load is above the
commissioned threshold
In all cases check the correct fault threshold is
commissioned, the speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
FRxx AMPy LINE-SHORT OFF - Short circuit line fault DC line monitoring: the DC line resistance has fallen
xx= Frame Address below the commissioned value indicating a full or
y=Slot Number partial short circuit.
AC line monitoring: monitoring signal is not being
detected indicating a short circuit.
Impedance monitoring: detected load has fallen below
the commissioned threshold indicating a full or partial
short circuit.
In all cases check the correct fault threshold is
commissioned, the speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
FRxx AMPy OUTPUT OFF - Loss of audio at output This fault is normally reported with:
xx= Frame Address • FRxx AMPy FAIL
y=Slot Number • FRxx AMPy LINE-SHORT
• FRxx AMPy INPUT
FRxx AMPy STANDBY FAIL OFF - External standby amplifier failure Indicates faulty standby amplifier module.
xx= Frame Address (Only for an external standby amplifier connected to a
y=Slot Number X400)
Replace the standby amplifier module.
FRxx AUX OFF FUSE Failure of frame auxiliary output Check rear panel AUX fuse on frame.
xx= Frame Address
FRxx BATTERY OFF POWER Failure of battery supply Check DC wiring, rear panel DC fuse and front panel
xx= Frame Address isolator switch on specified frame.
FRxx CHARGER FAIL OFF POWER X400 charger fault (for future use) No action.
xx=Frame Address
FRxx CPU-MEMORY ON - CPU memory fault or EEPROM failure Frame electronics will need replacing.
xx= Frame Address

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 69 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
FRxx CPU-RESET ON - CPU reset A one of occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
xx=Frame Address or transients. Repeated occurrences indicate faulty
electronics.
Replace the amplifier frame.
FRxx FUSE FAULT OFF FUSE Internal fuse Check internal fuse (F5 on V400).
xx= Frame Address
FRxx GENERAL FAULT OFF - Indicates an internal fault (X400): Replace the amplifier frame.
xx=Frame Address • On board voltage reference faults
• On board device faults (SPI / IIC /
DMA / CAN)
• Mezzanine board configuration fault
FRxx MAINS OFF POWER Failure of AC mains supply Check mains wiring, mains fuse in IEC inlet and front
xx= Frame Address panel isolator switch on specified frame. If all seems
ok, there may be an internal fault with the unit’s power
supply.
FRxx TEMP OFF - Over temperature alarm Check the ambient temperature in the equipment
xx= Frame Address room and investigate amplifier loading and drive
conditions.
FRxx/y CAN COMMS ON - Failure of CAN comms to a single Check CAN wiring to frame and status of front panel
xx= Frame Address amplifier in a frame isolator switches i.e. is it turned off?
y=Slot Number

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 70 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.8.4 V2000 Frame and Amplifier Faults

Table 9 V2000 Amplifier Frame and amplifier faults

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE Fault Description Suggested Action(s)


(front panel Faults menu) Fault LED (bottom line of LCD display)
FRMxxx AC POWER OFF POWER Indicates a fault with the mains power Check front MAINS switch.
xxx=Frame Address supply: Check mains power supply.
• MAINS front panel switch turned off
• Mains power lost
FRMxxx AUX OUTPUT OFF POWER Indicates a fault with the auxiliary DC Check the auxiliary supply is not overloaded (2 A
xxx=Frame Address output. limit).
FRMxxx BATTERY OFF POWER Indicates a fault with the battery power Check front BATTTERY switch.
xxx=Frame Address supply (if used): Check correct batteries fitted.
• BATTERY front panel switch turned Check battery power supply.
off Check battery connection cables are the correct
• Temperature sensor fault length and diameter.
• Battery power lost
• Battery voltage out of range
• Battery high temperature
• Battery high impedance
FRMxxx CONFIG OFF - Invalid static configuration Reload the PAVA SCT system configuration.
xxx=Frame Address Incompatibiliy between the XML and
binary configuration files.
FRMxxx DC SUPPLY OFF POWER Indicates a fault with the DC input supply. Check front BATTERY switch.
xxx=Frame Address • BATTERY front panel switch turned Check DC input power supply.
off.
• DC input power lost.
• DC input voltage out of range.
Notes:
a) Only reported for Amplifier Frame
configured to be powered by an
External DC Supply.)
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 71 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE Fault Description Suggested Action(s)


(front panel Faults menu) Fault LED (bottom line of LCD display)
FRMxxx NETWORK OFF - Indicates that the Amplfier Frame lost Check the network connection on both Amplfier
xxx=Frame Address Ethernet connection to one or more Frame and VIPEDIA-12s.
VIPEDIA-12 units that feed audio to the Check target VIPEDIA-12s and Amplifier Frames are
Amplfier Frame. operational.
It also indicates that the Amplfier Frame
lost Ethernet connection to the Amplfier
Frame containing the standby amplifier.
FRMxxx OFFLINE ON PATH Indicates that the VIPEDIA-12 unit lost Check the network connections of both units.
xxx=Frame Address Ethernet connection to the Amplifier Check the Amplifier Frame is operational (“processor”
Frame. LED is flashing).
Notes:
a) This fault is not included in the fault
count on the diplay top line.
b) NA
FRMxxx PSU OFF POWER Indicates a fault with the internal PSU: Check the rack ventilation / cooling and spacing
xxx=Frame Address • Auxiliary output voltage out of range above and below V2000 unit is correct. Clear faults
and confirm the fan operates.
• PSU high temperature
There may be an firmware issue or internal fault with
• PSU fan failure
the unit’s power supply; update the frame controller
• PSU comms failure firmware.
• Battery thermistor fault If the error persists, replace the Amplifier Frame.
FRMxxx RESET ON - An unexpected reset of the Amplifier A one of occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
xxx=Frame Address Frame has occurred (i.e. reset without or transients.
power cycling). Repeated occurrences indicate a firmware issue or
May occur after a configuration load. faulty electronics.
Clear faults.
If the error persists, replace the Amplifier Frame.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 72 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE Fault Description Suggested Action(s)


(front panel Faults menu) Fault LED (bottom line of LCD display)
FRMxxx/AMPyy AMP FAIL OFF PATH Indicates a fault with the amplifier: Check correct amplifier type is configured on the
xxx=Frame Address • Incorrect amplifire type V2000.
yy=Slot Number • Loss of audio input Check the amplifier output surveillance tone is
correctly commissioned.
• Faulty amplifier
Check the rack ventilation, spacing above and below
• Amplifier temperature alarm V2000 unit is correct, and amplifier audio load.
Replace amplifier.
Check the amplifier temperature using the V2000
DCT.
Replace the amplifier.
FRMxxx/AMPyy IEL-FAIL OFF PATH Indicates an IEL device is sending a Check the ID numbers of the connected IEL01
xxx=Frame Address faulty signal. devices are correct.
yy=Slot Number Identify the faulty device by removing one IEL01
device at a time until the fault is not reported.
Replace the affected IEL01 device.
FRMxxx/AMPyy IEL-LOST:z OFF PATH Indicates an IEL device has been not Check the ID numbers of the connected IEL01
xxx=Frame Address detected on the speaker line. devices are correct.
yy=Slot Number Check the HF tone is at a high enough level to power
z=IEL01 address (0 to F) all IEL devices.
Check the affected speaker line.
Replace the affected IEL01 device.
FRMxxx/AMPyy IEL-NEW OFF PATH Indicates an IEL01 device has been Check the ID numbers of the connected IEL01
xxx=Frame Address detected on the speaker line but is not devices are correct.
yy=Slot Number present in the Amplifier Frame Load the Amplifier Frame configuration.
configuration.
FRMxxx/AMPyy INPUT FAULT OFF PATH Loss of audio at input Check cabling from the VIPEDIA-12 to the input of the
xxx=Frame Address amplifier surveillance interface.
yy=Slot Number Check the VIPEDIA-12 output surveillance tone is
correctly commissioned.
Replace the LSZDC card.
FRMxxx/AMPyy LINE A ELK OFF EARTH Indicates an earth leakage path exists Check the correct fault threshold is commissioned, the
xxx=Frame Address between line A of the speaker circuit and speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
yy=Slot Number ground.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 73 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE Fault Description Suggested Action(s)


(front panel Faults menu) Fault LED (bottom line of LCD display)
FRMxxx/AMPyy LINE A O/C OFF PATH Indicates an open-circuit fault on a DC-EOL: One or more spurs have been lost indicating
xxx=Frame Address speaker line A. an open circuit.
yy=Slot Number Impedance: The detected impedance has decreased,
indicating an open circuit.
Loop Return: The received tone has decreased,
indicating an open circuit.
Check the correct fault threshold is commissioned, the
speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
FRMxxx/AMPyy LINE A S/C OFF PATH Indicates a short-circuit fault on a DC-EOL: The number of spurs has increased,
xxx=Frame Address speaker line A. indicating a short circuit.
yy=Slot Number Impedance: The detected impedance has increased,
indicating a short circuit.
Loop Return: The received tone has increased,
indicating a short circuit.
Check the correct fault threshold is commissioned, the
speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
FRMxxx/AMPyy LINE B ELK OFF EARTH Indicates an earth leakage path exists Check the correct fault threshold is commissioned, the
xxx=Frame Address between line B of the speaker circuit and speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
yy=Slot Number ground.

FRMxxx/AMPyy LINE B O/C OFF PATH Indicates an open-circuit fault on a DC-EOL: One or more spurs have been lost indicating
xxx=Frame Address speaker line B. an open circuit.
yy=Slot Number Impedance: The detected impedance has decreased,
indicating an open circuit.
Loop Return: The received tone has decreased,
indicating an open circuit.
Check the correct fault threshold is commissioned, the
speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
FRMxxx/AMPyy LINE B S/C OFF PATH Indicates a short-circuit fault on a DC-EOL: The number of spurs has increased,
xxx=Frame Address speaker line B. indicating a short circuit.
yy=Slot Number Impedance: The detected impedance has increased,
indicating a short circuit.
Loop Return: The received tone has increased,
indicating a short circuit.
Check the correct fault threshold is commissioned, the
speaker wiring and loudspeakers.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 74 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE Fault Description Suggested Action(s)


(front panel Faults menu) Fault LED (bottom line of LCD display)
FRMxxx/AMPyy LOOP OFF PATH RCD fault on either A or B speaker lines. Check speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
RETURN Check the amplifier output surveillance tone is
xxx=Frame Address correctly commissioned.
yy=Slot Number
FRMxxx/AMPyy RCD OFF EARTH Indicates the speaker line loop has been Check speaker wiring and loudspeakers.
xxx=Frame Address broken and the B output is now Replace the amplifier.
yy=Slot Number connected to drive audio both ways.

FRMxxx/AMPyy SURV CARD OFF - Indicates a fault with the LSZDC Check the LSZDC is fitted correctly.
xxx=Frame Address surveillance card: Check the LSZDC is not corrupted by checking the
yy=Slot Number • Comms fail firmware version on the V2000 DCT is valid.
• LSZDC CPU reset A one off occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
• LSZDC CPU memory or transients. Repeated occurrences indicate faulty
electronics.
Replace the LSZDC card.
FRMxxx/AMPyy OFF PATH Indicates overtemperature in the Check the rack ventilation, spacing above and below
TEMPERATURE amplifier. V2000 unit is correct, and amplifier audio load.
xxx=Frame Address Replace amplifier.
yy=Slot Number Check the amplifier temperature using the V2000
DCT.
Replace the amplifier.
Notes:
a) The Status tree on the VCT provides more details of the faults.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 75 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.8.5 Analogue Input and Microphone Faults

Table 10 Analogue input and microphone faults

Fault Code(s) System EARTH/PATH/POWER/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
IPxx AUDIO INPUT OFF PATH (b) Indicates that the surveillance tone from Check audio cabling and power supply cabling
xx=01 to 12 the audio device is not being detected. between microphone and VIPEDIA-12.
Replace the audio device (typically a microphone).
IPxx AUDIO INPUT S/C (b) OFF PATH Indicates that a short-circuit is present Check audio and data cabling between microphone
xx=01 to 12 between the data and audio wiring(s). and VIPEDIA-12.
MICxx CAPSULE OFF PATH Microphone capsule fault. Check continuity of microphone capsule and any
xx=01 to 12 associated wiring.
Replace the microphone.
MICxx COMMS ON PATH Microphone comms fault. Check data cabling or power supply cabling between
xx=01 to 12 microphone and VIPEDIA-12.
MICxx GENERAL (a) OFF - Indicates the microphone has a fault: If PTT is stuck, then press the centre of the navigation
xx=01 to 12 • NVM fault wheel to reset the PTT button.
• Capsule fault If zone select button is stuck, power cycle the
microphone.
• Fist PTT fault (if fitted)
Microphone will need replacing.
• Stuck PTT
• Stuck zone select button
• Host comms fault (up to MPS
V1.9.xxxx only)
MICxx POWER OFF POWER Power supply fault (dual interface Check power supply cabling between the microphone
xx=01 to 12 microphones only). and VIPEDIA-12.
If an EMS microphone, check DIN rail power supply
terminals on the microphone back box.
MICxx PTT OFF PATH Hardwired PTT fault. Check wiring between the fire microphone’s hardwired
xx=01 to 12 PTT and VIPEDIA-12.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 76 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Fault Code(s) System EARTH/PATH/POWER/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
MICxx RESET ON - This fault is normally reported when the If no MICxx SYSTEM fault is present, then clear the
xx=01 to 12 comms between the microphone and the fault.
VIPEDIA-12 is established and after If MICxx SYSTEM fault is present, a one-off
configuration download. This is used to occurrence may be experienced due to EMI or
synchronise the VIPEDIA-12 and the transients. Repeated occurrences indicate faulty
microphone. microphone electronics in which case microphone will
If a MICxx SYSTEM fault is also reported, need replacing.
then it indicates a microphone processor
reset.
MICxx SPEAKNOW OFF PATH Hardwired SPEAK NOW LED fault. Check wiring between the fire microphone’s hardwired
xx=01 to 12 Speak Now and VIPEDIA-12.
MICxx SYSTEM (a) ON - Indicates that the microphone has a A one-off occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
xx=01 to 12 critical fault (memory, configuration, or transients.
button board).
Notes:
(a) The fault menu on MPS and EMS microphones provides details of the fault.
To view the faults on the MPS/EMS:
1) Ensure the Operation menu is selected on the LCD display.
2) Toggle to the Fault list display by pressing .
3) The fault menu will be displayed.
4) Press  or  one or more times to select the MIC FAULTS tab.
(b) AUDIO INPUT will cause PATH fault for microphone inputs only.
(c) AUDIO INPUT S/C is only reported for EN 54 microphones only.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 77 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.10.8.6 BMB01 Remote I/O Unit and On-board GPIO Faults

Table 11 BMB01 Remote I/O Unit and on-board GPIO faults

Fault Code(s) System PATH/POWER/EARTH/FUSE


Fault LED Fault Description Suggested Action(s)
(front panel Faults menu) (bottom line of LCD display)
REMxx 24V POWER OUT OFF POWER Remote I/O Unit input voltage is out of Check power supply.
xx=Remote I/O Unit Address tolerance.
REMxx COMMS ON - Remote I/O Unit comms fault. Check the data connection and power wiring to
xx=Remote I/O Unit Address Remote I/O Unit.
Check RS485 termination.
Check that address of Remote I/O Unit is correct.
If all above ok, suspect the unit itself. Check the unit’s
internal CPU and COMMS LEDs.
REMxx CPU RESET ON - Remote I/O Unit reset. A one of occurrence may be experienced due to EMI
xx=Remote I/O Unit Address or transients. Repeated occurrences indicate faulty
electronics.
REMxx OVER TEMPERATURE OFF - Remote I/O Unit over temperature alarm. Check the ambient temperature in the equipment
xx=Remote I/O Unit Address room and investigate Remote I/O Unit loading and
drive conditions.
REMxx/AINyy ANALOGUE I/P OFF - Analogue input fault (open or short- Check wiring of Volume Control, Programme Selector,
xx=Remote I/O Unit Address circuit). or ANS on specified analogue channel.
(00 indicates an on-board
analogue input))
yy=Analogue Input Channel
REMxx/DOUTyy DIGITAL O/P OFF - Digital output fault (load disconnected or Check connection of the faulty digital output.
xx=Remote I/O Unit Address over current).
(00 indicates an on-board digital
output))
yy=Digital Output Channel
Use defined text OFF POWER (if contact is External fault. An analogue or digital input configured as a fault input
configured with Power Fault is in “fault” state.
enabled)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 78 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.11 Testing Functions

4.11.1 Testing the Indicators and the Alarm Sounder

A test function is available from the front panel that test all LED indicators, LCD display and alarm sounder
on the VIPEDIA-12.

To run the Lamp Test:

1. Press the LAMP TEST key on the front panel.


All indicators on the front panel, the LCD display and the fault sounder are tested.
On VIPEDIA-12, the frame LEDs and rack fans of associated V2000 units and all indicators on
associated V400/X400 frames are also tested.
On INTEGRA, the frame LEDs and the fans located at the rear of the back box are also tested.
The display shows “LAMP + LCD + SOUNDER TEST + FAN”, and then, solid white characters.
The menu locks for the entire duration of the test.
Notes:
a) The fault sounder is only tested on Fault Master units.
b) The Amplifier Frame built-in fan is not tested by the LAMP TEST function. It can be tested by
pressing the FAULT CLEAR key.
c) The LEDs on the D150/D500 amplifiers are not tested. They can be tested by routing audio to
associated zones.
These LEDs are not visible on INTEGRA.
d) The V2000 rack fans will only be turned on if controlled by a GPIO digital output.
2. On completion of the test, normal LED and sounder operation resumes.

4.11.2 Monitoring an Audio Input or Output

Any of the audio inputs and outputs on the VIPEDIA-12 can be displayed and monitored by the operation of
the Audio Monitoring function. A bargraph will be displayed indicating the detected level; see example in
Figure 22 (page 79).

Figure 22 Audio monitoring bargraph example

-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20dB




4.11.3 Audio Output

4.11.3.1 Monitoring an Analogue Output

To monitor the pre-fader level of an analogue output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsAnalogueAnalogue O/P nnPre-Fader.

To monitor the post-mute level of an analogue output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsAnalogueAnalogue O/P nnPost-Mute.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 79 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.11.3.2 Monitoring a DSP to FPGA Output

The audio routed from the DSP to the FPGA is used for internally routing the audio to DBB units and
Network Card; see Table 12 (page 80).

To monitor the pre-fader level of a DSP to FPGA output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsFPGANetwork O/P nnPre-Fader.

To monitor the post-mute level of a DSP to FPGA output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsFPGANetwork O/P nnPost-Mute.

Table 12 DSP to FPGA output mapping

TDM Slot Front Panel DSP O/P Default Data Source Network Card
Routing
Reference
1 Network O/P 01 FPGA01 Analogue Input 1 DBB & Network -
2 Network O/P 02 FPGA02 Analogue Input 2 DBB & Network -
3 Network O/P 03 FPGA03 Analogue Input 3 DBB & Network -
4 Network O/P 04 FPGA04 Analogue Input 4 DBB & Network -
5 Network O/P 05 FPGA05 Analogue Input 5 DBB & Network -
6 Network O/P 06 FPGA06 Analogue Input 6 DBB & Network -
TDM 1 (SPORT 6A)

7 Network O/P 07 FPGA07 Analogue Input 7 DBB & Network -


8 Network O/P 08 FPGA08 Analogue Input 8 DBB & Network -
9 Network O/P 09 FPGA09 Analogue Input 9 DBB & Network -
10 Network O/P 10 FPGA10 Analogue Input 10 DBB & Network -
11 Network O/P 11 FPGA11 Analogue Input 11 DBB & Network -
12 Network O/P 12 FPGA12 Analogue Input 12 DBB & Network -
13 Network O/P 13 FPGA13 DVA Player 1 DBB & Network -
14 Network O/P 14 FPGA14 DVA Player 2 DBB & Network -
15 Network O/P 15 FPGA15 DVA Player 3 DBB & Network -
16 Network O/P 16 FPGA16 DVA Player 4 DBB & Network -
1 Network O/P 17 FPGA17 DVA Player 5 DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch5 (VNET)
2 Network O/P 18 FPGA18 DVA Player 6 DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch6 (VNET)
3 Network O/P 19 FPGA19 DVA Player 7 DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch7 (VNET)
4 Network O/P 20 FPGA20 DVA Player 8 DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch8 (VNET)
5 Network O/P 21 FPGA21 Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch1 (VNET)
6 Network O/P 22 FPGA22 Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch2 (VNET)
TDM 2 (SPORT 6B)

7 Network O/P 23 FPGA23 PMC1 (Loopback To DBB) DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch3 (VNET)
8 Network O/P 24 FPGA24 PMC2 (Loopback To DBB) DBB & Network Ana IP/OP to PMC Ch4 (VNET)
9 Network O/P 25 FPGA25 PMC1 (Output) Host & Network -
10 Network O/P 26 FPGA26 PMC2 (Output) Host & Network -
11 Network O/P 27 FPGA27 Analogue Output 1 Network PMC Tx1 (Vipedia)
12 Network O/P 28 FPGA28 Analogue Output 2 Network PMC Tx2 (Vipedia)
13 Network O/P 29 FPGA29 Analogue Output 3 Network PMC Tx3 (Vipedia)
14 Network O/P 30 FPGA30 Analogue Output 4 Network PMC Tx4 (Vipedia)
15 Network O/P 31 FPGA31 Analogue Output 5 Network PMC Tx5 (Vipedia)
16 Network O/P 32 FPGA32 Analogue Output 6 Network PMC Tx6 (Vipedia)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 80 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.11.3.3 Monitoring a PMC Output

To monitor the pre-fader level of a PMC output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsPMCPMC O/P nnPre-Fader.

To monitor the post-mute level of a PMC output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsPMCPMC O/P nnPost-Mute.

4.11.3.4 Monitoring an Amplifier Output

When monitoring an amplifier, the audio monitor facility actually monitors the audio feeding the speaker
circuit associated with a particular amplifier.
If an amplifier has failed and a standby is in operation, then it is possible to still monitor the audio associated
with that speaker circuit, i.e. the audio being monitored is from the standby amplifier, which is feeding the
failed amplifier’s speaker output.
The system remains monitoring whilst within this menu with regular display refreshes and finishes when the
menu times out, the BACK key is pressed, or if any new faults occur.

To monitor an amplifier output:

Select TestMonitorAudioOutputsAmp audio outputV400 or V2000 1Frame #nnn.

4.11.4 Audio Input

4.11.4.1 Monitoring an Analogue Input

To monitor an analogue input level:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsAnalogueAnalogue I/P nnAudio.

To monitor an analogue input surveillance tone:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsAnalogueAnalogue I/P nnSurveillance.

4.11.4.2 Monitoring a DVA Input

To monitor pre-fader level of a DVA input:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsDVADVA nnPre-Fader.

To monitor post-fader level of a DVA input:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsDVADVA nnPost-Fader.

1
V2000: VIPEDIA-12 can only monitor amplifier outputs that have audio feed from the this VIPEDIA-12.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 81 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.11.4.3 Monitoring a FPGA to DSP Input

The audio routed from the FPGA to the DSP is internally used for routing audio between VIPEDIA-12 units in
a DBB group or for Dante™ audio routing on/between VIPEDIA-12-PRO units.
The audio on the DBB bus and Dante™ channels can be monitored as described in the following sections:
• DBB bus: see Section “4.11.4.3.1 Monitoring Audio on the DBB Bus” (page 82).
• Dante™ channels: see Section “4.11.4.3.2 Monitoring Audio in a Dante™ Channel” (page 91).

4.11.4.3.1 Monitoring Audio on the DBB Bus


The Network I/P allocation depends on the DBB member ID of the VIPEDIA-12 unit see examples of DBB
group in Figure 23 (page 82).
The Network I/P allocation is described as follows:
• DBB Member 1: see Table 13 (page 83).
• DBB Member 2: see Table 14 (page 85).
• DBB Member 3: see Table 15 (page 87).
• DBB Member 4: see Table 16 (page 89).

Figure 23 DBB group and member ID (example)

24x24 DBB Group 36x36 DBB Group 48x48 DBB Group

VIPEDIA-12 VIPEDIA-12 VIPEDIA-12


(DBB Member 1) (DBB Member 1) (DBB Member 1)

DBB bus DBB bus DBB bus

VIPEDIA-12 VIPEDIA-12 VIPEDIA-12


(DBB Member 2) (DBB Member 2) (DBB Member 2)

DBB bus DBB bus

VIPEDIA-12 VIPEDIA-12
(DBB Member 3) (DBB Member 3)

DBB bus

The DBB member ID is configured using the VIPEDIA-12 System Configuration VIPEDIA-12
Tool. The DBB member ID does not have to match the physical connection and (DBB Member 4)
does not have to be sequential.

To monitor a FPGA to DSP input:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsFPGANetwork I/P nnAudio.

To monitor a FPGA to DSP input surveillance tone:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsFPGANetwork I/P nnSurveillance.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 82 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Table 13 FPGA to DSP input mapping for DBB Member 1

DBB Member 1
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
1 Network I/P 01 FPGA01 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 02 FPGA02 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 03 FPGA03 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 04 FPGA04 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 05 FPGA05 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 06 FPGA06 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 1 (SPORT 3A)

7 Network I/P 07 FPGA07 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 08 FPGA08 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 09 FPGA09 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 10 FPGA10 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 11 FPGA11 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 12 FPGA12 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 13 FPGA13 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 14 FPGA14 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 15 FPGA15 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 16 FPGA16 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 17 FPGA17 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 18 FPGA18 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 19 FPGA19 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 20 FPGA20 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 21 FPGA21 DBB Member 2 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 22 FPGA22 DBB Member 2 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 2 (SPORT 3B)

7 Network I/P 23 FPGA23 DBB Member 2 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 24 FPGA24 DBB Member 2 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 25 FPGA25 Local PMC1 (Input) Host
10 Network I/P 26 FPGA26 Local PMC2 (Input) Host
11 Network I/P 27 FPGA27 Spare1
12 Network I/P 28 FPGA28 Spare2
13 Network I/P 29 FPGA29 Spare3
14 Network I/P 30 FPGA30 Spare4
15 Network I/P 31 FPGA31 Spare5
16 Network I/P 32 FPGA32 Spare6
1 Network I/P 33 FPGA33 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 34 FPGA34 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
TDM 3 (SPORT 4A)

3 Network I/P 35 FPGA35 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 3 DBB


4 Network I/P 36 FPGA36 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 37 FPGA37 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 38 FPGA38 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
7 Network I/P 39 FPGA39 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 7 DBB
8 Network I/P 40 FPGA40 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 41 FPGA41 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 9 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 83 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DBB Member 1
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
10 Network I/P 42 FPGA42 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 43 FPGA43 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 44 FPGA44 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 45 FPGA45 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 46 FPGA46 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 47 FPGA47 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 48 FPGA48 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 49 FPGA49 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 50 FPGA50 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 51 FPGA51 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 52 FPGA52 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 53 FPGA53 DBB Member 3 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 54 FPGA54 DBB Member 3 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 4 (SPORT 4B)

7 Network I/P 55 FPGA55 DBB Member 3 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 56 FPGA56 DBB Member 3 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 57 FPGA57 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 5 DBB
10 Network I/P 58 FPGA58 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 6 DBB
11 Network I/P 59 FPGA59 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 7 DBB
12 Network I/P 60 FPGA60 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 8 DBB
13 Network I/P 61 FPGA61 DBB Member 4 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 62 FPGA62 DBB Member 4 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 63 FPGA63 DBB Member 4 – PMC1 DBB
16 Network I/P 64 FPGA64 DBB Member 4 – PMC2 DBB
1 Network I/P 65 FPGA65 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 66 FPGA66 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 67 FPGA67 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 68 FPGA68 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 69 FPGA69 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 70 FPGA70 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 5 (SPORT 5A)

7 Network I/P 71 FPGA71 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 72 FPGA72 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 73 FPGA73 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 74 FPGA74 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 75 FPGA75 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 76 FPGA76 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 77 FPGA77 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 78 FPGA78 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 79 FPGA79 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 80 FPGA80 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 4 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 84 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Table 14 FPGA to DSP input mapping for DBB Member 2

DBB Member 2
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
1 Network I/P 01 FPGA01 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 02 FPGA02 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 03 FPGA03 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 04 FPGA04 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 05 FPGA05 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 06 FPGA06 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 1 (SPORT 3A)

7 Network I/P 07 FPGA07 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 08 FPGA08 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 09 FPGA09 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 10 FPGA10 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 11 FPGA11 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 12 FPGA12 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 13 FPGA13 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 14 FPGA14 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 15 FPGA15 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 16 FPGA16 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 17 FPGA17 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 18 FPGA18 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 19 FPGA19 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 20 FPGA20 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 21 FPGA21 DBB Member 1 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 22 FPGA22 DBB Member 1 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 2 (SPORT 3B)

7 Network I/P 23 FPGA23 DBB Member 1 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 24 FPGA24 DBB Member 1 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 25 FPGA25 Local PMC1 (Input) Host
10 Network I/P 26 FPGA26 Local PMC2 (Input) Host
11 Network I/P 27 FPGA27 Spare1
12 Network I/P 28 FPGA28 Spare2
13 Network I/P 29 FPGA29 Spare3
14 Network I/P 30 FPGA30 Spare4
15 Network I/P 31 FPGA31 Spare5
16 Network I/P 32 FPGA32 Spare6
1 Network I/P 33 FPGA33 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 34 FPGA34 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
TDM 3 (SPORT 4A)

3 Network I/P 35 FPGA35 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 3 DBB


4 Network I/P 36 FPGA36 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 37 FPGA37 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 38 FPGA38 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
7 Network I/P 39 FPGA39 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 7 DBB
8 Network I/P 40 FPGA40 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 41 FPGA41 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 9 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 85 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DBB Member 2
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
10 Network I/P 42 FPGA42 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 43 FPGA43 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 44 FPGA44 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 45 FPGA45 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 46 FPGA46 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 47 FPGA47 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 48 FPGA48 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 49 FPGA49 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 50 FPGA50 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 51 FPGA51 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 52 FPGA52 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 53 FPGA53 DBB Member 3 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 54 FPGA54 DBB Member 3 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 4 (SPORT 4B)

7 Network I/P 55 FPGA55 DBB Member 3 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 56 FPGA56 DBB Member 3 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 57 FPGA57 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 5 DBB
10 Network I/P 58 FPGA58 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 6 DBB
11 Network I/P 59 FPGA59 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 7 DBB
12 Network I/P 60 FPGA60 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 8 DBB
13 Network I/P 61 FPGA61 DBB Member 4 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 62 FPGA62 DBB Member 4 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 63 FPGA63 DBB Member 4 – PMC1 DBB
16 Network I/P 64 FPGA64 DBB Member 4 – PMC2 DBB
1 Network I/P 65 FPGA65 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 66 FPGA66 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 67 FPGA67 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 68 FPGA68 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 69 FPGA69 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 70 FPGA70 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 5 (SPORT 5A)

7 Network I/P 71 FPGA71 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 72 FPGA72 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 73 FPGA73 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 74 FPGA74 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 75 FPGA75 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 76 FPGA76 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 77 FPGA77 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 78 FPGA78 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 79 FPGA79 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 80 FPGA80 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 4 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 86 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Table 15 FPGA to DSP input mapping for DBB Member 3

DBB Member 3
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
1 Network I/P 01 FPGA01 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 02 FPGA02 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 03 FPGA03 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 04 FPGA04 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 05 FPGA05 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 06 FPGA06 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 1 (SPORT 3A)

7 Network I/P 07 FPGA07 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 08 FPGA08 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 09 FPGA09 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 10 FPGA10 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 11 FPGA11 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 12 FPGA12 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 13 FPGA13 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 14 FPGA14 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 15 FPGA15 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 16 FPGA16 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 17 FPGA17 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 18 FPGA18 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 19 FPGA19 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 20 FPGA20 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 21 FPGA21 DBB Member 1 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 22 FPGA22 DBB Member 1 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 2 (SPORT 3B)

7 Network I/P 23 FPGA23 DBB Member 1 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 24 FPGA24 DBB Member 1 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 25 FPGA25 Local PMC1 (Input) Host
10 Network I/P 26 FPGA26 Local PMC2 (Input) Host
11 Network I/P 27 FPGA27 Spare1
12 Network I/P 28 FPGA28 Spare2
13 Network I/P 29 FPGA29 Spare3
14 Network I/P 30 FPGA30 Spare4
15 Network I/P 31 FPGA31 Spare5
16 Network I/P 32 FPGA32 Spare6
1 Network I/P 33 FPGA33 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 34 FPGA34 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
TDM 3 (SPORT 4A)

3 Network I/P 35 FPGA35 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 3 DBB


4 Network I/P 36 FPGA36 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 37 FPGA37 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 38 FPGA38 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
7 Network I/P 39 FPGA39 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 7 DBB
8 Network I/P 40 FPGA40 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 41 FPGA41 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 9 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 87 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DBB Member 3
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
10 Network I/P 42 FPGA42 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 43 FPGA43 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 44 FPGA44 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 45 FPGA45 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 46 FPGA46 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 47 FPGA47 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 48 FPGA48 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 49 FPGA49 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 50 FPGA50 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 51 FPGA51 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 52 FPGA52 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 53 FPGA53 DBB Member 2 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 54 FPGA54 DBB Member 2 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 4 (SPORT 4B)

7 Network I/P 55 FPGA55 DBB Member 2 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 56 FPGA56 DBB Member 2 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 57 FPGA57 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 5 DBB
10 Network I/P 58 FPGA58 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 6 DBB
11 Network I/P 59 FPGA59 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 7 DBB
12 Network I/P 60 FPGA60 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 8 DBB
13 Network I/P 61 FPGA61 DBB Member 4 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 62 FPGA62 DBB Member 4 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 63 FPGA63 DBB Member 4 – PMC1 DBB
16 Network I/P 64 FPGA64 DBB Member 4 – PMC2 DBB
1 Network I/P 65 FPGA65 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 66 FPGA66 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 67 FPGA67 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 68 FPGA68 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 69 FPGA69 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 70 FPGA70 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 5 (SPORT 5A)

7 Network I/P 71 FPGA71 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 72 FPGA72 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 73 FPGA73 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 74 FPGA74 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 75 FPGA75 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 76 FPGA76 DBB Member 4 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 77 FPGA77 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 78 FPGA78 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 79 FPGA79 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 80 FPGA80 DBB Member 4 – DVA Player 4 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 88 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Table 16 FPGA to DSP input mapping for DBB Member 4

DBB Member 4
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
1 Network I/P 01 FPGA01 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 02 FPGA02 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 03 FPGA03 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 04 FPGA04 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 05 FPGA05 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 06 FPGA06 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 1 (SPORT 3A)

7 Network I/P 07 FPGA07 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 08 FPGA08 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 09 FPGA09 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 10 FPGA10 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 11 FPGA11 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 12 FPGA12 DBB Member 1 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 13 FPGA13 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 14 FPGA14 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 15 FPGA15 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 16 FPGA16 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 17 FPGA17 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 18 FPGA18 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 19 FPGA19 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 20 FPGA20 DBB Member 1 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 21 FPGA21 DBB Member 1 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 22 FPGA22 DBB Member 1 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 2 (SPORT 3B)

7 Network I/P 23 FPGA23 DBB Member 1 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 24 FPGA24 DBB Member 1 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 25 FPGA25 Local PMC1 (Input) Host
10 Network I/P 26 FPGA26 Local PMC2 (Input) Host
11 Network I/P 27 FPGA27 Spare1
12 Network I/P 28 FPGA28 Spare2
13 Network I/P 29 FPGA29 Spare3
14 Network I/P 30 FPGA30 Spare4
15 Network I/P 31 FPGA31 Spare5
16 Network I/P 32 FPGA32 Spare6
1 Network I/P 33 FPGA33 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 34 FPGA34 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
TDM 3 (SPORT 4A)

3 Network I/P 35 FPGA35 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 3 DBB


4 Network I/P 36 FPGA36 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 37 FPGA37 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 38 FPGA38 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
7 Network I/P 39 FPGA39 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 7 DBB
8 Network I/P 40 FPGA40 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 41 FPGA41 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 9 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 89 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DBB Member 4
TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Default Data Source
Reference
10 Network I/P 42 FPGA42 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 43 FPGA43 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 44 FPGA44 DBB Member 2 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 45 FPGA45 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 46 FPGA46 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 47 FPGA47 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 48 FPGA48 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 4 DBB
1 Network I/P 49 FPGA49 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 5 DBB
2 Network I/P 50 FPGA50 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 6 DBB
3 Network I/P 51 FPGA51 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 7 DBB
4 Network I/P 52 FPGA52 DBB Member 2 – DVA Player 8 DBB
5 Network I/P 53 FPGA53 DBB Member 2 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
6 Network I/P 54 FPGA54 DBB Member 2 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
TDM 4 (SPORT 4B)

7 Network I/P 55 FPGA55 DBB Member 2 – PMC1 DBB


8 Network I/P 56 FPGA56 DBB Member 2 – PMC2 DBB
9 Network I/P 57 FPGA57 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 5 DBB
10 Network I/P 58 FPGA58 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 6 DBB
11 Network I/P 59 FPGA59 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 7 DBB
12 Network I/P 60 FPGA60 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 8 DBB
13 Network I/P 61 FPGA61 DBB Member 3 – Listen-In Mixer 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 62 FPGA62 DBB Member 3 – Listen-In Mixer 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 63 FPGA63 DBB Member 3 – PMC1 DBB
16 Network I/P 64 FPGA64 DBB Member 3 – PMC2 DBB
1 Network I/P 65 FPGA65 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 1 DBB
2 Network I/P 66 FPGA66 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 2 DBB
3 Network I/P 67 FPGA67 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 3 DBB
4 Network I/P 68 FPGA68 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 4 DBB
5 Network I/P 69 FPGA69 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 5 DBB
6 Network I/P 70 FPGA70 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 6 DBB
TDM 5 (SPORT 5A)

7 Network I/P 71 FPGA71 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 7 DBB


8 Network I/P 72 FPGA72 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 8 DBB
9 Network I/P 73 FPGA73 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 9 DBB
10 Network I/P 74 FPGA74 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 10 DBB
11 Network I/P 75 FPGA75 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 11 DBB
12 Network I/P 76 FPGA76 DBB Member 3 - Analogue Input 12 DBB
13 Network I/P 77 FPGA77 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 1 DBB
14 Network I/P 78 FPGA78 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 2 DBB
15 Network I/P 79 FPGA79 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 3 DBB
16 Network I/P 80 FPGA80 DBB Member 3 – DVA Player 4 DBB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 90 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.11.4.3.2 Monitoring Audio in a Dante™ Channel


FPGA channels 49 to 80 are used for Dante™ audio routing on VIPEDIA-12-PRO as described in Table 17
(page 91).

To monitor a FPGA to DSP input:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsFPGANetwork I/P nnAudio.

Table 17 FPGA to DSP input mapping for VIPEDIA-12-PRO

TDM Slot Front Panel DSP I/P Routing Reference Default Data Source
1 Network I/P 49 FPGA49 Dante Rx 17 Dante™
2 Network I/P 50 FPGA50 Dante Rx 18 Dante™
3 Network I/P 51 FPGA51 Dante Rx 19 Dante™
4 Network I/P 52 FPGA52 Dante Rx 20 Dante™
5 Network I/P 53 FPGA53 Dante Rx 21 Dante™
6 Network I/P 54 FPGA54 Dante Rx 22 Dante™
TDM 4 (SPORT 4B)

7 Network I/P 55 FPGA55 Dante Rx 23 Dante™


8 Network I/P 56 FPGA56 Dante Rx 24 Dante™
9 Network I/P 57 FPGA57 Dante Rx 25 Dante™
10 Network I/P 58 FPGA58 Dante Rx 26 Dante™
11 Network I/P 59 FPGA59 Dante Rx 27 Dante™
12 Network I/P 60 FPGA60 Dante Rx 28 Dante™
13 Network I/P 61 FPGA61 Dante Rx 29 Dante™
14 Network I/P 62 FPGA62 Dante Rx 30 Dante™
15 Network I/P 63 FPGA63 Dante Rx 31 Dante™
16 Network I/P 64 FPGA64 Dante Rx 32 Dante™
1 Network I/P 65 FPGA65 Dante Rx 01 Dante™
2 Network I/P 66 FPGA66 Dante Rx 02 Dante™
3 Network I/P 67 FPGA67 Dante Rx 03 Dante™
4 Network I/P 68 FPGA68 Dante Rx 04 Dante™
5 Network I/P 69 FPGA69 Dante Rx 05 Dante™
6 Network I/P 70 FPGA70 Dante Rx 06 Dante™
TDM 5 (SPORT 5A)

7 Network I/P 71 FPGA71 Dante Rx 07 Dante™


8 Network I/P 72 FPGA72 Dante Rx 08 Dante™
9 Network I/P 73 FPGA73 Dante Rx 09 Dante™
10 Network I/P 74 FPGA74 Dante Rx 10 Dante™
11 Network I/P 75 FPGA75 Dante Rx 11 Dante™
12 Network I/P 76 FPGA76 Dante Rx 12 Dante™
13 Network I/P 77 FPGA77 Dante Rx 13 Dante™
14 Network I/P 78 FPGA78 Dante Rx 14 Dante™
15 Network I/P 79 FPGA79 Dante Rx 15 Dante™
16 Network I/P 80 FPGA80 Dante Rx 16 Dante™

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 91 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4.11.4.4 Monitoring a PMC Input (Audio from the Network Card)

The audio routed between VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router and their Network Card can be monitored as
described below.

To monitor a Network Card channel:

Select TestMonitorAudioInputsPMCPMC I/P nn.

Table 18 PMC input mapping

TDM Slot Front Panel DSP O/P Default Data Source


Routing
Reference
1 PMC I/P 01 NET01 Network Input 01 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
2 PMC I/P 02 NET02 Network Input 02 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
3 PMC I/P 03 NET03 Network Input 03 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
4 PMC I/P 04 NET04 Network Input 04 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
5 PMC I/P 05 NET05 Network Input 05 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
6 PMC I/P 06 NET06 Network Input 06 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
7 PMC I/P 07 NET07 Network Input 07 VIPA output of master Vipedia. Network
For VIPA audio source into Vipedia via Network Card.
8 PMC I/P 08 NET08 Network Input 08 Loopback for monitoring TDM channels used for VIPA Network
TDM 1 (SPORT 2A)

routes (i.e. Network Inputs 1 to 7).


9 PMC I/P 09 NET09 Network Input 09 Loopback for monitoring TDM channels used for Network
Vipedia routes (i.e. Network Inputs 11 to 16).
10 PMC I/P 10 NET10 Network Input 10 Reserved Network
11 PMC I/P 11 NET11 Network Input 11 Vipedia output of DBB master Vipedia (PMC Rx1). Network
For remote Vipedia sources (including IP mics) into
Vipedia via Network Card.
12 PMC I/P 12 NET12 Network Input 12 Vipedia output of DBB master Vipedia (PMC Rx2). Network
For remote Vipedia sources (including IP mics) into
Vipedia via Network Card.
13 PMC I/P 13 NET13 Network Input 13 Vipedia output of DBB master Vipedia (PMC Rx3). Network
For remote Vipedia sources (including IP mics) into
Vipedia via Network Card.
14 PMC I/P 14 NET14 Network Input 14 Vipedia output of DBB master Vipedia (PMC Rx4). Network
For remote Vipedia sources (including IP mics) into
Vipedia via Network Card.
15 PMC I/P 15 NET15 Network Input 15 Vipedia output of DBB master Vipedia (PMC Rx5). Network
For remote Vipedia sources (including IP mics) into
Vipedia via Network Card.
16 PMC I/P 16 NET16 Network Input 16 Vipedia output of DBB master Vipedia (PMC Rx6). Network
For remote Vipedia sources (including IP mics) into
Vipedia via Network Card.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 92 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

TDM Slot Front Panel DSP O/P Default Data Source


Routing
Reference
1 PMC I/P 17 NET17 Network Input 17 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
2 PMC I/P 18 NET18 Network Input 18 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
3 PMC I/P 19 NET19 Network Input 19 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
4 PMC I/P 20 NET20 Network Input 20 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
5 PMC I/P 21 NET21 Network Input 21 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
6 PMC I/P 22 NET22 Network Input 22 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
TDM 2 (SPORT 2B)

7 PMC I/P 23 NET23 Network Input 23 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
8 PMC I/P 24 NET24 Network Input 24 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
9 PMC I/P 25 NET25 Network Input 25 Loopback for Vipedia TDM channel monitoring Network
10 PMC I/P 26 NET26 Network Input 26 Reserved Network
11 PMC I/P 27 NET27 Network Input 27 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
12 PMC I/P 28 NET28 Network Input 28 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
13 PMC I/P 29 NET29 Network Input 29 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
14 PMC I/P 30 NET30 Network Input 30 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
15 PMC I/P 31 NET31 Network Input 31 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).
16 PMC I/P 32 NET32 Network Input 32 Vipedia VIPA output to DBB slave (when slave DBB Network
unit not fitted with Network Card).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 93 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5 VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool

The VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool (VIPEDIA-12 DCT) tool enables users to commission the
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router audio settings and to load DVA messages into VIPEDIA-12s. It also enables
users to read the audio settings from a VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router into a file and to write the audio
settings from a file into a VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router.
This section provides information on the operation of the VIPEDIA-12 DCT.

Only qualified personnel who are very familiar with the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA equipment, the
installation and its configuration requirements should alter the system configuration.
Any adjustment of audio parameters may leave the system in a dangerous state where it will not
correctly respond to alarm inputs or may not produce adequate sound pressure levels or
intelligibility to comply with Voice Alarm Standards.
Similarly, it is possible for the untrained operator to inadvertently disable system surveillance
functions that are mandated by Voice Alarm standards.
If required, contact ASL or an appointed ASL distributor for support.

Notes:

a) The VIPEDIA-12 DCT is part of the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) which is installed as
described in “APPENDIX B – Installing the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT)” (page 181).
b) The operation described here is correct for the current version of the VIPEDIA-12 DCT at the time of the
publication of this document (V3.3.0.0).
If the VIPEDIA-12 in your system has a later (or earlier) version of software, then it may mean that some
aspects of the operation of the matching VIPEDIA-12 DCT are subtly different from the operation
described in this document, or that enhanced features have been added.
If any difficulties are encountered, contact ASL or an appointed ASL distributor, quoting the Build
Standard and software versions of your VIPEDIA-12 unit and the VIPEDIA-12 DCT; see Section
“6.2.1 Build Standard and Software Versions” (page 159).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 94 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.1 Overview of the GUI Elements

5.1.1 Main GUI Elements

The main GUI elements are shown in Figure 24 (page 95) and briefly described in Table 19 (page 96).

Figure 24 Main GUI elements

General controls buttons:


• Accept Unit Faults
Metering
• Clear Unit Faults
• Commit System Settings
• Retrieve System Settings
• Manage Audio Settings Page tabs
• Load Unit DVA
Mute button

Date&Time and change


status message (if any)

Properties button
VIPEDIA-12 list (drop-down menu) Connection status

Notes:
a) The Inputs, DVAs and Outputs pages either display only the inputs, DVAs and outputs that are present
in the system configuration along with their names. Refer to Section “5.2 Starting and Closing the
Application” (page 99) for further details.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 95 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Table 19 Elements of the main GUI

Element Description
Accept Unit Accepts all current faults on all units in the PA/VA system. It also
Faults button steadies the flashing fault LED indication, and turns off the audible
alarm until a new fault condition occurs.
Clear Unit Faults Clears all faults on all units in the PA/VA system. It also sets all
button connected equipment to the 'no faults' state, which also cancels any
amplifier changeovers in effect. If there are any faults present in the
system, then they are detected anew, and reported again.
Commit System Commits all live settings to NVM. Applies to all units in the system.
Settings button

Retrieve System Rolls back to the settings last saved into NVM. Applies to all units in the
Settings button system.
Manage Audio Launches the Audio Settings Manager tool which enables the audio
Settings… button settings to be extracted from a VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router into a file.
It also enables the audio settings to be downloaded from a file into a
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router.
Refer to Section “5.5 Extracting and Injecting Audio Settings to/from a
File” (page 147).
Load Unit DVA Loads DVA messages (from the Micro-SD) into the selected VIPEDIA-
button 12/INTEGRA Router.
Refer to Section “5.6 Loading DVA Messages” (page 150).
Mute button Mutes an input or output.

Metering bars : displays the detected level at an input or output:


• input: post-fader and post-mute level
• output: post-fader level (green: unmuted / red: muted)

: displays the detected attenuation

The detected level is displayed above the metering bars:


• The top numerical value is the RMS dB value with a peak hold.
• The bottom numerical value is the current RMS dB value.

Properties button Opens the Properties window for an input or output.

VIPEDIA-12 List of all VIPEDIA-12 units (bottom-left corner).

Page tabs Labels the user interface’s pages, and gives access to them.

Connection status Displays the status of the connection between the application and the
currently selected VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router (right-bottom corner).
Date&Time Displays the current date and time (bottom-left corner). If any setting is
changed, it also displays a warning indicating that changes have not
been saved into a unit’s EEPROM; see example below.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 96 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Version number The application version number is displayed with the window title (top-
left corner).
Window controls Standard controls (top-right corner):
: closes/exits the application
: maximises the application
: minimises the application

5.1.2 Data Input Controls

Different types of controls are provided on the main GUI and Properties window; see Table 20 (page 97).

Table 20 Data input controls

Element Description

Slider Allows the user to set a value by moving the indicator up and
down.
The slider is displayed with the metering bars.
The text field at the bottom of a metering bar indicates the current
level.
The top text field indicates the current measured level.

To adjust a parameter:

1. Click and hold the slider.


2. Drag the slider up and down.

Knob Allows the user to set a value by moving the indicator up and
down.

To adjust a parameter:

1. Click and hold the knob.


2. Drag the knob up to turn it clockwise, down to turn it
counterclockwise.
Text field Allows the user to either type a value directly into the text field or
select from a list of existing values.

To adjust a parameter:

1. Double-click the displayed value of a parameter.


2. A data input dialog box will be displayed.
3. Enter the required value by using the up and down arrows or
typing it into the text field.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 97 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Check box Allows the user to enable or disable a function.


 (checked): enabled
 (unchecked): disabled

To adjust a parameter:

Click the check box to toggle between enabled and disabled.


Radio Allows the user to choose only one of a predefined set of options.
button
To adjust a parameter:

Click the radio button of required option.

5.1.3 Password Protect Parameters and Functions

The adjustment of parameters that may disable system surveillance functions that are mandated by Voice
Alarm standards or leave the system in a dangerous state are password protected. The Commit Settings
function is also protected for the same reasons. The password (PIN) is available from ASL or appointed ASL
distributor.

Figure 25 PIN input dialog box

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 98 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.2 Starting and Closing the Application

To start the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool:

1. First launch the PAVA SCT by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen and then
selecting the following option.
All ProgramsASLPAVA System Configuration ToolPAVA SCT <version>System
Configuration Tool <version>

Or by double-click the application’s icon on the desktop .


2. Load the system configuration into the PAVA SCT.
a. Click on the icon on the toolbar.
Or select FileOpen from the menubar.
Or press Ctrl+O on the keyboard.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 99 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

b. A browser window will be opened. Navigate to system configuration file to be uploaded (*.xml).

c. Click the Open button.


3. Select the PC network interface used to connect to the PA/VA system.
a. Ensure that the required network interface is connected to the PA/VA system network.
b. Select PreferencesNetwork Connections from the menubar.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 100 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

c. Select the required network interface, and then click the Ok button.

Note that only active network interfaces are


displayed for selection.
If the required network interface is not displayed,
check the network connection between the PC
and the PA/VA system. Also ensure that the
target PA/VA units are powered on. Close and re-
load the Network Adapter selection dialog box.

4. Select the VIPEDIA-12 DCT display mode.


a. Select PreferencesVipedia Dynamic Tool Display Mode from the menubar.
b. Select the required display mode:
• All Inputs/Output: all inputs and outputs displayed; see Example 1 (page 102).
• Only Configured Inputs/Outputs: only configured inputs and outputs displayed;
see Example 2 (page 103).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 101 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5. Double-click the VIPEDIA-12 DCT application’s icon on the toolbar.


Or select the ToolsVIPEDIA DCT menubar option.
Note:
If no network interface has been selected or the selected interface is inactive, the Network Adapter
selection dialog box will be displayed as described above.

6. The VIPEDIA-12 DCT will launch after a few seconds (up to 15 seconds).

Example 1: All Inputs/Output Display Mode – Inputs Page

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 102 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Example 2: Only Configured Inputs/Outputs Display Mode - Inputs Page

Input name as
configured in the
system configuration.

Inputs 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 not shown as


they are not configured as a
microphone, miscellaneous input,
DANS or wall mount controller.

7. Check the connection between the VIPEDIA-12 DCT and the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers.

Measured level,
i.e. not -inf

Comms OK

a. Select a VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router from the drop-down menu located on the bottom-left corner
of the main GUI.
b. Confirm that the meter for all inputs indicate the measured level, i.e., not “inf”.
Warnings:
You may have to clear faults after power cycle for correct operation of the meters.
c. Confirm that “Vipedia Control Comms OK” is displayed on the bottom-right corner to the main GUI.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 103 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

d. Confirm that the Properties windows display sensible configuration, i.e. some check boxes enabled
but not all.
e. In case of any errors, check the IP settings on both target unit and configuration PC, the network
connections including the configuration PC settings (see “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements” on
page 176) and firewall settings.
Close and re-start the VIPEDIA-12 DCT.
Note that PC security features (such as antivirus and the Windows firewall) and wireless
connections may prevent the correct operation of the VIPEDIA-12 DCT. If required, temporally
disable these features.
8. Select the required VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router in the drop-down list on the bottom-left corner of the
GUI and perform the required operation as described in the following sections.

To close the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool:

1. Click the window close control on the top right corner to the main GUI.
or
2. Press ALT+F4 on the keyboard.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 104 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3 Commissioning the Audio Settings

a) Only qualified personnel who are very familiar with the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA equipment and
system commissioning requirements should alter the audio settings.
Any adjustment of audio parameters may leave the system in a dangerous state where it will
not correctly respond to alarm inputs or may not produce adequate sound pressure levels or
intelligibility to comply with Voice Alarm Standards.
Similarly, it is possible for the untrained operator to inadvertently disable system surveillance
functions that are mandated by Voice Alarm standards
b) All adjustments work in real time, so it can be experienced immediately on any live routes.
c) All changes are implemented in RAM, and have to be manually transferred from RAM to the
NVM via the Commit Settings button; see Section “5.3.4 Committing the Live Settings”
(page 144).
Do not turn the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA unit off before committing the changes. Otherwise,
recent changes to the audio settings will be lost!
The committed settings should always be extracted to a file via the Manage Audio
Settings… button. This is to ensure that the commissioned audio settings can be restored in
the event that the unit’s configuration is accidentally cleared or a replacement unit is
commissioned.

5.3.1 Commissioning an Audio Input

The input equaliser, gate, compressor and limiter are disabled on VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers with DANS
input(s); see examples of the input Properties dialog in Figure 26 and Figure 27 below.

Figure 26 Input Properties dialog – VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers with no DANS inputs (example)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 105 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 27 Input Properties dialog – VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers with DANS input(s) (example)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 106 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.1 Adjusting the Input Level

The fader allows adjustment of the input audio level. A Mute button allows the user to mute or unmute the
audio input. The associated meter will display the detected level after the trimmer, fader and mute.
The input gain of each audio input should normally be set so that all inputs are balanced and give the same
output level on each of the outputs.

Figure 28 Input – Level and mute

Adjustment range: -90 dB to +10 dB

To adjust the input level:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Drag the slider up or down to adjust the level of the required input(s).
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.
The input gain of each audio input should normally be set so that all inputs are balanced and give the
same output level on each of the outputs.
3. The meter displays the detected the audio level after the trimmer, fader and mute.
Note that if the input surveillance tone detection has not been enabled, the metering will display the
input surveillance tone level.

To mute/unmute an input:

Click the Mute button to toggle between muted and unmated settings.

(up): unmuted

(down): muted

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 107 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.2 Configuring the Input Sensitivity

The Sensitivity controls the gain structure at the analogue input stage allowing the user to boost or cut the
incoming signal in 20 dB steps.

Figure 29 Input Properties – Sensitivity

Available options: 0, -20 dB, -40 dB or -60 dB

To select the input sensitivity:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click the radio button of the required option.

Warnings:
a) Inputs connected to ASL microphones should be set with 0 dB sensitivity.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 108 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.3 Trimming the Input

The input trimmer allows adjustment of the input audio level. The associated meter will display the detected
level after the trimmer and before the fader and mute.

Figure 30 Input Properties – Trim

Adjustment range: -90 dB to +10 dB

To trim an input:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Drag the slider up or down as required.
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.
4. The meter displays the detected the audio level after the trimmer and before the fader and mute.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 109 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.4 Configuring the Input Surveillance Tone

The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router can detect the presence of a low frequency surveillance tone, nominally
20 Hz to 30 Hz, at the inputs. ASL microphones generate this tone as standard. If this surveillance is
enabled, then in the absence of a surveillance tone, an Input Audio fault will be raised and logged.
The input surveillance tone detection can be enabled or disabled per input, and the detection threshold is
adjustable per input.

Warnings:

a) The input surveillance should be enabled and the correct fault threshold level commissioned on all
emergency microphones in EN 54-16 systems.
b) NA

Figure 31 Input Properties – Surveillance tone

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 110 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Adjustment range: -60 dB to +20 dB

To enable or disable the input surveillance tone detection:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click Surveillance check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the input surveillance tone
detection.
Note that disablement of the surveillance tone detection is password protected.

To commission the input surveillance tone threshold for ASL microphones:

1. Adjust threshold level to -60 dB.


2. Clear any existing faults by pressing the Clear Faults button on the main GUI (or unit’s front panel).
3. Any fault reported by the microphone at this stage should be cleared
4. Raise the surveillance tone level slowly (1 dB step) from -60dB until the “IPxx AUDIO INPUT” fault is
reported. Where xx is the input connected to the microphone.
5. Set the surveillance tone level to 4 dB below the level that caused the fault to be reported.
For example, if a –18 dB level causes the fault, then set the surveillance tone level to –22 dB.
Typical values for ASL microphones are:
• MPS/EMS microphones: -14 dB
• DMS microphones: -9 dB
6. Clear faults and ensure that no faults are reported for the input.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 111 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.5 Enabling/Disabling the Input High Pass Filter

Figure 32 Input Properties – High Pass Filter

To enable or disable the input High Pass Filter:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click HPF check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the High Pass Filter.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 112 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.6 Configuring the Input Equaliser

A 4-band parametric EQ is configurable for each of the inputs. The high and low bands are shelving filters,
whilst the middle bands are peaking.
Note that the input equaliser should not be used to set the equalisation of a particular output. Outputs have
their own equalisation settings; see Section “5.3.3.6 Configuring the Output Equaliser” (page 136).

Warnings:

a) The frequency response should be flat for all emergency microphones in EN 54-16 systems. This is
achieved by setting the Gain to -3.3 dB at 251 Hz with Q of 1.
b) NA

Figure 33 Input Properties – Equaliser

Low band adjustment range:

• Frequency: 20 Hz to 200 Hz
• Gain: -18 dB to +18 dB
• Slope: +6 dB to +12 dB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 113 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

High and Low Mid band adjustment range:

• Frequency: 200 Hz to 20 kHz


• Gain: -18 dB to +18 dB
• Q: 1.0 to 5.0

High band adjustment range:

• Frequency: 2 kHz to 20 kHz


• Gain: -18 dB to +18 dB
• Slope: +6 dB to +12 dB

To enable or disable the input equaliser:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click EQ check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the input equaliser.

To configure a frequency band:

1. Drag the appropriate Freq knob up or down to adjust the frequency.


2. Drag the appropriate Gain knob up or down to adjust the gain.
3. Drag the appropriate Slope or Q knob up or down to adjust the slope or Q.
4. You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.
5. If required, use the Reset button to restore the default settings for the frequency band.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 114 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.7 Configuring the Pre-Announcement Chime

A pre-announcement chime can be configured in the XML system configuration. If configured, then the
chime will be triggered when the input source is routed. The actual audio input will only be routed when the
chime is complete. Various types of chimes are available and the chime level is configurable using the
VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool.

Figure 34 Input Properties – Chime

Adjustment range: -60 dB to +20 dB

To adjust the chime level:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Drag the Level knob up or down as required.
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 115 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.8 Enabling/Disabling the Phantom Power

A +48 V phantom power can be switched on or off for an analogue input.

Figure 35 Input Properties – Phantom Power

To enable or disable the Phantom Power:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click Phantom Power check box to switch on (checked) or off (unchecked) the phantom power.
Note that enablement of phantom power is password protected to prevent accidental damage to
unsuitable connected equipment.
Ensure phantom power is switched off on inputs connected to ASL microphones.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 116 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.9 Configuring the Input Phase

The phase of an input can be reversed as required, for example, to correct errors in the wiring.

Figure 36 Input Properties – Invert Phase

To change the input phase:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click Phase Invert check box to reverse (checked) or not (unchecked) the input phase.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 117 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.10 Configuring the Input Limiter

The input limiter is a peak limiter that allows reduction of the input audio level when it exceeds a configurable
Threshold. It provides control over how quickly it applies the reduction (Attack time) and restores the input
level (Release time). The amount of time (Hold time) the input level remains reduced before it is restored to
the normal level is also configurable. Because the limiter is reducing the level, a Make Up Gain is provided to
enable a fixed amount of make-up gain to be added to the input level so that an optimum level can be
achieved.
The Lim. Red meter will display the reduction applied to the input.

Figure 37 Input Properties – Limiter

Adjustment range:

Threshold: -60 dB to +20 dB


Attack: 0.1 ms to 200 ms
Hold: 25 ms to 5 s
Release: 50 ms 3 s
Make up gain: 0 to +20 dB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 118 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To enable or disable the input limiter:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click Limiter check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the limiter.

To configure the input limiter:

1. Drag the Threshold knob up or down to adjust the threshold.


2. Drag the Attack knob up or down to adjust the attack time.
3. Drag the Hold knob up or down to adjust the hold time.
4. Drag the Release knob up or down to adjust the release time.
5. Drag the Make Up Gain knob up or down to adjust the make up gain.
6. You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 119 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.11 Configuring the Input Compressor

The input compressor allows reduction of the input gain when it exceeds a configurable Threshold. It
provides control over how quickly it applies the reduction (Attack time) and restores the input level (Release
time). The amount of gain reduction is defined by a configurable Ratio. A ratio of 5:1 means that if the input
level is 5 dB over the threshold, the input level after the compressor will be 1 dB over the threshold.
The compressor is configurable to be Peak or RMS. The peak sensing compressor compares the
instantaneous level of the input signal with the Threshold. The RMS compressor compares the average
(RMS) level of the input signal with the Threshold.
A configurable Knee allows control how the compression ratio is increased as the input level increases and
eventually reaches the configured compression ratio. A soft knee provides a smoother transition and,
therefore, reduces the audible change from uncompressed to compressed, especially for higher ratios where
the changeover is more noticeable.
Because the compressor is reducing the input gain, a Make Up Gain is provided to enable a fixed amount of
make-up gain to be added to the input gain so that an optimum level can be achieved.
The Gain. Red meter will display the gain reduction applied to the input.
Note that the input compressor in conjunction with the output equaliser (limiter and clipper) are used to
provide the audio signal that meet the requirements of induction loop systems that use ASL ILP02 Induction
Loop Panel. Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for further details.

Figure 38 Input Properties – Compressor

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 120 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Adjustment range:

Threshold: -60 dB to +20 dB


Ratio: 1:1 to ∝:1
Attack: 0.1 ms to 200 ms
Release: 50 ms 3 s
Knee: 0 to +12 dB
Make up gain: 0 to +20 dB

To enable or disable the input compressor:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click Compressor check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the compressor.

To configure the input compressor:

1. Click the Peak or RMS type to select the compressor type.


2. Drag the Threshold knob up or down to adjust the threshold.
3. Drag the Ratio knob up or down to adjust the compressor ratio.
4. Drag the Attack knob up or down to adjust the attack time.
5. Drag the Hold knob up or down to adjust the hold time.
6. Drag the Release knob up or down to adjust the release time.
7. Drag the Knee knob up or down to adjust the knee level.
8. Drag the Make Up Gain knob up or down to adjust the make up gain.
9. You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

Notes:

a) Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for settings required for an audio input
that is used for induction loop.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 121 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.1.12 Configuring the Input Noise Gate (e.g. for VOX Routing)

The noise gate allows reduction of the input audio level when it is below a configurable Threshold. It provides
control over how quickly it applies the reduction (Release time) and restores the input level (Attack time). The
amount of time (Hold time) the input level remains at normal level after the input level falls below the
threshold is also configurable.
Note that the input noise gate is used for VOX routing.

Figure 39 Input Properties – Gate

Adjustment range:

Threshold: -60 dB to +20 dB


Attack: 0.1 ms to 200 ms
Hold: 25 ms to 5000 ms
Release: 50 ms 3000 ms
Make up gain: 0 to +20 dB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 122 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To enable or disable the input noise gate:

1. Select the Inputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required input.
3. Click Gate check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the noise gate.

To configure the input noise gate:

1. Drag the Threshold knob up or down to adjust the threshold.


2. Drag the Attack knob up or down to adjust the attack time.
3. Drag the Hold knob up or down to adjust the hold time.
4. Drag the Release knob up or down to adjust the release time.
5. You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

To configure the input noise gate for VOX routing:

1. Enable the Gate.


2. Set the Threshold to the required level to trigger the route.
The Threshold should be set to a reasonable level so that it does not to trigger on background noise
but activate the route as soon as any genuine program material occur (typically around -50 dB).
3. Set Attack to 0.1 ms (i.e. as fast as possible).
4. Set Hold to 5000 ms to allow for general breathing and natural pauses in speech without closing the
route.
This is the time for which the gate (and thus the route) will be held open after the signal (last) went
above the threshold.
5. Set Release to 1000 ms (or as required) so that the route fades out reasonably smoothly.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 123 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.2 Adjusting a DVA Input Level


Figure 40 DVA – Level and mute

Adjustment range: -90 dB to +10 dB

To adjust the DVA input level:

1. Select the required DVA page if not already done.


2. Drag the slider up or down to adjust the level of the required DVA input(s).
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

To mute/unmute a DVA input:

Click the Mute button to toggle between muted and unmated settings.

(up): unmuted

(down): muted

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 124 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3 Commissioning an Audio Output


The Outputs page will show a DANS Properties button for VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers with DANS
input(s); see example in Figure 41 below.
Please refer to ASL for DANS commissioning information.

Figure 41 Output – VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers with DANS inputs (example)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 125 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.1 Adjusting the Output Level

The fader allows adjustment of the output audio level. A Mute button allows the user to mute or unmute the
audio output. The associated meter will display the detected output level after the fader and before the mute.
Once all the inputs have been balanced in order to give the same volume as each other, by adjusting the
input gain, each output can be set to give the correct sound pressure level in the output zone, by means of
its output gain.

Figure 42 Output – Level and mute

Adjustment range: -90 dB to +10 dB

To adjust the output level:

Note that output level adjustments should be performed with volume control functions, such as ANS and
Night Time Volume Control disabled on the output.
1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.
2. Drag the slider up or down to adjust the level of the required output(s).
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.
3. The meter displays the detected the audio level after the fader and before the mute.

To mute/unmute an output:

Click the Mute button to toggle between muted and unmuted settings.

(up): Unmuted (green metering level)

(down): Muted (red metering level)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 126 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.2 Configuring the Output Surveillance Tone

The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router is capable of generating and superimposing up to two surveillance tones
at each audio output. Normally a low frequency surveillance tone and a high frequency surveillance tone.
The surveillance tone generation is configurable to “off” (disabled), “on” (continuous), or “pulsed” per output,
and the frequency and pulse parameters are configured for the unit as a whole.
Each output can be configured separately to receive either tone (low frequency or high frequency) or the mix
of both. The required levels of the two surveillance tone sources are independently configured creating a mix
that is available for all outputs.
The output surveillances tones are configured in two steps; first the generators, then the outputs.
If surveillance is required, then the advantage of the pulsed mode over the continuous mode is that less
power is used by the surveillance function in pulsed mode, while still providing the required surveillance. This
is especially important when operating from batteries.
The advantage of the pulsed mode over the continuous mode is that less power is used by the surveillance
function in pulsed mode, while still providing the required surveillance. Alternatively, low power is used in
continuous mode if the surveillance tone level is very low (e.g. for V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame). This is
especially important when operating from batteries.

To configure the Surveillance Generators:

1. Select the Global Settings page; see Figure 43 (page 127).

Figure 43 Global Settings – Surveillance Generators

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 127 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

2. The configuration of the generator(s) depends on the amplifier frame and method of loudspeaker line
surveillance being used.
a. V400 and X400:
• DC surveillance with EOL10K resistors: low frequency
Generator 1:
Frequency: Pulsed / 30Hz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width: 1.5s / Pulse Offset: 0.0s
Generator 2:
Frequency: Off
• AC surveillance with AEL01 or AEL02 Active End of Line Device(s): low and high frequencies
Generator 1:
Frequency: Pulsed / 30Hz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width: 1.5s / Pulse Offset: 0.0s
Generator 2:
Frequency: Pulsed / 20kHz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width: 10.0s / Pulse Offset: 0.1s
• Impedance monitoring: low frequency
Generator 1:
Frequency: Pulsed / 30Hz / Pulse Interval: 20.0s / Pulse Width: 3.0s / Pulse Offset: 0.0s
Generator 2:
Frequency: Off
b. V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame: all methods of loudspeaker line monitoring
Generator 1:
Frequency: On / 20Hz / Pulse Interval: Not used / Pulse Width: Not used / Pulse Offset: Not used
Generator 2:
Frequency: Off

To configure Outputs:

The outputs can be configured in one of two ways. Either using the global settings page, or in each output’s
properties window.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 128 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To configure the output surveillance tone using the Global Settings page:

1. Select the Global Settings page if not already done; see Figure 44 (page 129).

Figure 44 Global Settings – Outputs


Surveillance Generator
1
Surveillance Generator
2

2. For V400 and X400, configure the surveillance tone level as required by the loudspeaker line
surveillance method being used.
• DC surveillance with EOL10K resistors:
a. Choose the correct output and set the low frequency generator to “on” (continuous). Ensure the
other generator is set to “off”.
b. Set the Send Level to –6 dB (reference level).
c. Measure the tone on the output and adjust the Send Level to ensure a nominal 1 to 1.5 V RMS.
d. After the levels have been set and the nominal RMS voltage has been achieved at the required
outputs, set the outputs to “pulsed”. Ensure the other generator is set to “off”.
• AC surveillance with AEL01 or AEL02 Active End of Line Device(s):
a. Choose the correct output and set the low frequency generator to “on” (continuous). Ensure the
other generator is set to “off”.
b. Set the low frequency Send Level to –4 dB (reference level).
c. Measure the tone on the output and adjust the Send Level to ensure a nominal 1.5 V RMS
tone.
d. On the same output set the low frequency generator to “off” and the high frequency generator to
“on” (continuous).
e. Set the high frequency Send Level to –21 dB (reference level)
f. Measure the tone on the output and adjust the Send Level to ensure a nominal 8 V RMS tone.
g. After the levels have been set and the nominal RMS voltage has been achieved at the required
outputs, set the outputs for both surveillance tone generators to “pulsed”.

• Impedance monitoring:

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 129 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

a. Set the Send Level to –6 dB (reference level).


b. Choose the correct output and set the low frequency generator to “on”. Ensure the other
generator is set to “off”.
c. Measure the tone on the output and adjust the Send Level to ensure a nominal 1 to 1.5 V RMS.
d. If required, increase the Send Level up to 2 V RMS (measured on the output) for stable
impedance readings on low loads, typically below 25 W.
e. After the levels have been set and the nominal RMS voltage has been achieved at the required
outputs, set the outputs to “pulsed”. Ensure the other generator is set to “off”.
3. For V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame, configure the surveillance tone as follows irrespective of the
loudspeaker line surveillance method being used.
a. Choose the correct output and set the low frequency generator to “on”.
b. Ensure the other generator is set to “off”.
c. Set the Send Level to –30 dB (always).
d. Ensure the outputs are set to “on” (continuous). Ensure the other generator is set to “off”.

To configure the output surveillance tone using the Output Properties window:

1. Select the Output tab if not already done; see Figure 45 (page 130).

Figure 45 Output – Surveillance tone

2. Click the Properties button for the appropriate output.


3. Follow the same configuration procedure as for the Global Settings page above.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 130 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.3 Configuring the Output Delay

An output can be configured to play the audio after a delay (between 1 ms to 5 seconds). This may be useful
in a situation where the audio output needs to be synchronised with another event in the system.

Notes:

a) A non-negligible latency is present when audio is broadcast over the IP network by the Network Card. As
result of the Network Card intrinsic latency, audio broadcasts to local and remote outputs will be out of
sync.
The INTEGRA/VIPEDIA-12 Router has an algorithm that adds the Network Card latency to the local
output delay whenever an input is shared with an output PMC channel to synchronise broadcasts to local
and remote outputs.
b) Up to VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA V3.2.0.1, the compensation delay is set on Output 12 of each
INTEGRA/VIPEDIA-12 Router using the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool as described below.
It should not matter if the delay is enabled or disabled in the setup for the other outputs, but if an
additional delay is not required for a given output, the output delay must be set to 0 ms (outputs 1 to 11).
For example, if no delays are required for operational purposes, set outputs 1 to 11 with 0 ms delay
(enabled or disabled state should not matter), and then set output 12 delay to the network compensation
delay value. The compensation delay is about 341 ms for default Network Card and it should be adjusted
for each system.
c) From VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA V3.2.0.2, the Network Card informs its default latency to the Router which
then adds the latency to the local output delay as described above. The default Network Card latency
can be overridden using the PAVA SCT configuration as required (for example, to compensate for
network latency). Refer to the PAVA SCT User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for further details.

Figure 46 Output Properties – Delay

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 131 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Adjustment range: 1 ms to 5 s

To adjust the output delay:

1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required output.
3. Click the Delay checkbox to enable delay.
4. Drag the Delay knob up or down as required.
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 132 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.4 Commissioning the Override Gain

The override gain setting enables each zone to be independently adjusted for the level of the audio in the
hardware bypass failsafe mode when the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router is in the failsafe override mode.

Figure 47 Output Properties – Override

Adjustment range: -31.5 dB to 0 dB

To adjust the override gain:

1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required output.
3. Click the Override check box to put the VIPEDIA-12 into the hardware bypass failsafe override mode.
This is so that if the fire microphone PTT is operated it uses the analogue override path NOT the normal
DSP path. Therefore, the fire microphone can be used to demonstrate the effect of adjusting the
override gain to correctly set the level of the override mode gain.
Note that the override gain setting is password protected.
4. Drag the Gain knob up or down as required.
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.
5. The VIPEDIA-12 will automatically be put back into normal operation mode when the Properties dialog
box is closed.

Warning:

The override gain on a dual interface microphone should be set so that it is adequate for each interface. This
requires the disconnection of the other pair of serial comms and hardwired PTT and Speak Now.
For example, if the microphone’s ROUTER 1 port is connected to Vipedia 1 and ROUTER 2’s port is
connected to Vipedia 2 and you want to set the override gain when Vipedia 1 connections are used, then you
would have to disconnect Vipedia 2 connections (i.e. microphone’s ROUTER 2 port and associated
hardwired PTT and Speak Now.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 133 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.5 Configuring the Night Time Volume Control Cap Level

The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router provides a Night Time Volume Control (NVC) function. This is a facility for
automatically limiting the volume of non-emergency broadcasts at configurable times of the day, usually
during the night. The routes subject to the NVC control are configured in the system configuration using the
PAVA System Configuration Tool. The NVC control is enabled or disabled and the volume cap is configured
using the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool. The NVC is not applied to emergency broadcasts
irrespective of the PAVA SCT configuration.
Any new route established when a NVC period is active will be subject to output volume capping for each
output whose volume is controlled by the Night Time Volume Control as follows:
• If the route is not controlled by the NVC, then the nominal output gain is used.
• If the route is controlled by the NVC, then either the nominal output gain or the configured maximum
gain for in the NVC is used, whichever is lower.
Where the nominal output gain for an output in dB is the sum of the output gain, the ANS compensation (if
applicable), the attenuation by any output gain control mechanism (if applicable), and the attenuation by a
Volume Control mechanism (if applicable).

Notes:

If fitted with a VIPEDIA-NET Network Card, the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router supports the external
overriding of the night volume enablement and volume cap level. Typically, the override messages would be
sent from an iVENCS control system over IP to the VIPEDIA-12 via the Network Card.
The override settings are non-volatile and do not expire and normal operation can only be restored by the
external control. This feature was implemented to ensure that reboots of the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router
(perhaps by service personnel) did not result in an unexpected change in output level and difficult to trace
service calls that NVC levels had spontaneously changed.
The override settings are not saved into NVM immediately after the override. It takes about 15 seconds.
1) The NVC override status is not displayed on the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool. The override
status is available on the serial monitor (“nvc-override” command).
2) When NVC overrides are in place, the operation of the VIPEDIA-12 DCT may not be obvious. e.g.:
a) If a level override is in place, the level set by VIPEDIA-12 DCT will have no effect on the current level
for that output. The level will however be stored and utilised when/if the override level is restored by
the external control.
b) If a NVC operation override is in place, the setting of the NVC control for that output will have no
effect (it will be at the current cap level).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 134 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 48 Output Properties – NVC

Adjustment range: -60 dB to +20 dB

To enable or disable the Night Time Volume Control (NVC):

1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required output.
3. Click the NVC check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the NVC control.

To adjust the NVC cap level:

Drag the Gain Limit knob up or down as required.


You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

Notes:

a) The NVC is not applied to emergency broadcasts irrespective of the PAVA SCT configuration.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 135 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.6 Configuring the Output Equaliser

A 10-band parametric EQ is configurable for each of the outputs. The highest and lowest bands are shelving
filters, whilst the middle 8 bands are peaking. The equaliser can be enabled or disabled as a whole. Each of
the frequency bands can be individually enabled or disabled.
Note that the input compressor in conjunction with the output equaliser (limiter and clipper) are used to
provide the audio signal that meet the requirements of induction loop systems that use ASL ILP02 Induction
Loop Panel. Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 page 175) for further details.

Figure 49 Output Properties – Equaliser

Lowest band adjustment range:

• Frequency: 20 Hz to 200 Hz
• Gain: -18 dB to +18 dB
• Slope: +6 dB to +12 dB

Bands 2 to 9 adjustment range:

• Frequency: 20 Hz to 20 kHz
• Gain: -18 dB to +18 dB
• Q: 1.0 to 5.0

Highest band adjustment range:

• Frequency: 2 kHz to 20 kHz


• Gain: -18 dB to +18 dB
• Slope: +6 dB to +12 dB

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 136 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To enable or disable the output equaliser:

1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required output.
3. Click Parametric EQ check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the output equaliser.

To configure a frequency band:

1. Click the appropriate check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) a frequency band.
2. Drag the Freq knob up or down to adjust the frequency.
3. Drag the Gain knob up or down to adjust the gain.
4. Drag the Slope or Q knob up or down to adjust the slope or Q.
5. You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.
6. If required, use the Reset button next to the OK button on the right-bottom corner to reset the equaliser
to a flat response.

Notes:

a) Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for settings required for an output that is
used for induction loop.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 137 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.7 Configuring the Output Relative Gains

Normally all input gains will be set to “balance” each of the inputs, and the output gain will be set to give the
required level at each output. However, if any input is desired to have a different gain in a particular output or
outputs, then these inputs can be given a different gain relative to each appropriate output.
A route that requires the output relative gain settings needs to be configured to one of the available volume
control types (Type 1 to Type 8) in the system configuration using the PAVA System Configuration Tool. The
required volume control type on each appropriate output can then be configured to a different gain using the
VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool.

Figure 50 Output Properties – Input Type Gain Adjustment

Adjustment range for Type 1 to Type 8: -30 dB to +10 dB

To adjust the output relative gain of an input:

1. Find the volume control type assigned to the input being adjusted (Type 1 to Type 8).
2. Drag the appropriate knob up or down to adjust the relative gain.
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 138 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.8 Configuring the Anti-Feedback Cap Level

The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router provides an anti-feedback control, which limits the output level when
routed to an input subject to the anti-feedback control. The inputs and outputs subject to the anti-feedback
control is configured in the system configuration using the PAVA System Configuration Tool 1, and the cap
level is configured using the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool.

Figure 51 Output Properties – Anti-feedback control

Adjustment range for Type 1 to Type 8: 60 dB to +20 dB

To adjust the anti-feedback cap level:

Drag the AFB Lvl Cap knob up or down to adjust the maximum output level when routed to an input subject
to the anti-feedback control.
You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

1
The anti-feedback cap level is not supported by the PAVA System Configuration Tool at the time of publication of this document.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 139 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.9 Configuring the Output Limiter

The output limiter is a peak limiter that allows reduction of the output audio level when it exceeds a
configurable Threshold. It provides control over how quickly it applies the reduction (Attack time) and
restores the output level (Release time). The amount of time (Hold time) the output level remains reduced
before it is restored to the normal level is also configurable. Because the limiter is reducing the level, a Make
Up Gain is provided to enable a fixed amount of make up gain to be added to the output level so that an
optimum level can be achieved.
The Lim. Red meter will display the reduction applied to the output.
Note that the input compressor in conjunction with the output equaliser (limiter and clipper) are used to
provide the audio signal that meet the requirements of induction loop systems that use ASL ILP02 Induction
Loop Panel. Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for further details.

Figure 52 Output Properties – Limiter

Adjustment range:

Threshold: -60 dB to +20 dB


Attack: 0.1 ms to 200 ms
Hold: 25 ms to 5 s
Release: 50 ms 3 s
Make up gain: 0 to +20 dB

Notes:

a) The Limiter should be enabled on outputs feeding a V2000/INTEGRA Amplifier Frame.


Refer to the V2000 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for appropriate settings.
b) Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for settings required for an output that is
used for induction loop.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 140 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To enable or disable the output limiter:

1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required output.
3. Click Limiter check box to enable (checked) or disable (unchecked) the limiter.

To configure the output limiter:

1. Drag the Threshold knob up or down to adjust the threshold.


2. Drag the Attack knob up or down to adjust the attack time.
3. Drag the Hold knob up or down to adjust the hold time.
4. Drag the Release knob up or down to adjust the release time.
5. Drag the Make Up Gain knob up or down to adjust the make up gain.
6. You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 141 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.3.10 Configuring the Hard Clipper

The output hard clipper can be selected between a configurable fixed hard clip level and a dynamic hard clip
level which calculates the saturation level depending on the amplitude of the output surveillance tones.
Note that the input compressor in conjunction with the output equaliser (limiter and clipper) are used to
provide the audio signal that meet the requirements of induction loop systems that use ASL ILP02 Induction
Loop Panel. Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for further details.

Figure 53 Output Properties – Hard Clipper

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 142 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Adjustment range: 0 dB to +20 dB

To select the hard clip:

1. Select the Outputs page if not already done.


2. Click the Properties button of the required output.
3. Click the Clipper check box to select between fixed hard clip level (checked) or dynamic hard clip level
(unchecked).
Warning:
Outputs connected to ASL Amplifier Frames (V400, X400 and V2000) should have the Hard Clipper
enabled at +2dBu. The Hard Clipper limits the programme audio so it does not intermodulate with the
surveillance tone.

To adjust the fixed hard clip level:

Drag the Level knob up or down as required.


You can also double-click the text field and type in the required value.

Notes:

a) Refer to the ILP02 User’s Manual (see Table 21 on page 175) for settings required for an output that is
used for induction loop.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 143 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.4 Committing the Live Settings

1) All changes to the audio settings work in real time and are implemented in RAM, and
therefore, are not permanent. All settings will be lost if the unit is turned off.
2) It is essential that the live settings be committed, i.e. transferred from RAM to NVM when the
system commissioning has been completed.
3) The VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool will display a warning if an attempt to close the
application is made before all changes have been committed.

Figure 54 Commit Settings

To commit the live settings:

1. Click the Commit System Settings button on the left-side of the main GUI.
Notes: The Commit Settings function is password protected.
The live settings will be committed to each unit accessed by the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic
Configuration Tool.
2. Extract the commissioned audio settings into a file by pressing the Manage Audio Settings…; see
Section “5.5 Extracting and Injecting Audio Settings to/from a File” (page 147).
This is to ensure that the commissioned audio settings can be restored in the event that the unit’s
configuration is accidentally cleared or a replacement unit is commissioned.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 144 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.3.5 Rolling Back to the Last Committed Audio Settings

The current working live settings can be replaced with the values last saved into NVM. This allows recovery
from a wrongly adjusted system.

Figure 55 Retrieve Settings

To retrieve the audio settings:

Click the Retrieve System Settings button on the left-side of the main GUI.
The values last saved into NVM will be retrieved into all units in the system configuration.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 145 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.4 Accepting and Clearing Faults


The VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool allows the user to accept (acknowledge) and clear faults on all
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units in the PA/VA system.

Figure 56 Fault accept/clear

To accept faults:

Click the Accept Unit Faults button on the left-side of the main GUI.
All current faults on all VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units in the PA/VA system will be accepted (acknowledged).
The flashing fault LED indication will be steadied, and audible alarm will be turned off until a new fault
condition occurs.

To clear faults:

Click the Clear Faults button on the left-side of the main GUI.
All current faults on all VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA units in the PA/VA system will be cleared. All connected
equipment will set to the “no faults” state, which will also cancel any amplifier changeovers in effect. If a fault
cleared in this way still persists, then the fault warning condition will be detected anew and reported again.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 146 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.5 Extracting and Injecting Audio Settings to/from a File


The audio settings are extracted from a VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router into a file and vice-versa by using the
Audio Settings Manager tool.

The audio settings are stored in a comma-separated-value (CSV) file.


Some applications may corrupt the configuration data, causing the CSV file to become invalid for
re-injection back into the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router. Therefore, CSV files should only be
accessed under guidance from ASL.

Figure 57 Audio Settings Manager

To extract/inject the audio settings to/from a file:

1. Click the Manage Audio Settings… button on the


left-side of the main GUI.
The Audio Settings Manager will be launched.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 147 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

2. Configure the connection settings by overwriting


the current values.
Configuration PC:
• IP address: enter the Configuration PC IP
address.
Target VIPEDIA-12:
• IP address: enter the IP address of the target
VIPEDIA-12 unit which is available from the
front panel menu option:
Configuration>Router>Identity>IP Config>IP Addr

• Unit ID: enter the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA


Router ID which is available from the front
panel menu option:
Configuration>Router>Identity>Unit Identity>Id

The tool on the right is configured to extract/inject


audio settings from a VIPEDIA-12 unit with an IP
address 192.168.1.10 from a PC with an IP
address 192.168.1.63.

3. Make sure the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router is


operational.
4. Connect to the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router by
clicking on the Connect button.
The Health Monitor indicates the connection status:
• grey (both indicators): not connected
• green (right indicator): connection OK
• red (left indicator): connection not OK

5. If DANS configuration is expected to be present in


the target VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router, the
DANS option should be enabled.
If it is not expected, then leave the option disabled.
To enable the option, select Options>DANS
Expected from the menubar.
Notes:
a) Connection to the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA
Router is required before the DANS option can
be enabled.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 148 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6. Once connected to the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA


Router, perform the required operation.
The progress bar shows the status of the
operation.

7. To read the dynamic configuration (live settings) from the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router, click the
Extract button.
The configuration will be extracted from the unit and saved into the selected location/CSV file.
It is recommended that the identification of the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router be included in the
filename.
Notes:
a) Parameters configured from the front panel are not part of the XML configuration file or the CSV file
retrieved from the live settings using the Audio Settings Manager. Therefore, it is highly
recommended that these settings be manually retrieved from the front panel display and safely
stored in another file.
b) NA

8. To write the dynamic configuration into the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router, click the Inject button.
The configuration from the selected location/file will be uploaded into the unit’s live settings. Make sure
that the correct file is selected.
If the operation fails, repeat the upload procedure.
Finalize the upload operation by either saving the live settings into the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router’s
EEPROM or rolling back the live settings to the previous configuration:
• To save the live settings into the EEPROM, click the Commit button.
• To roll back the live settings to the previous configuration, click the Retrieve button.
Notes:
a) When exiting, the application will warn the user that the new settings have not been committed if an
injection operation has not been finalized. If this happens, ensure the application is connected to the
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router and finalize the operation either by committing or retrieving the
configuration as described above.
b) NA
9. Once the extraction/injection operation has been completed, click the Disconnect button.
10. Repeat steps 2 to 9 for the next VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router.
11. Exit the Audio Settings Manager by clicking “X” on the right corner of the window or by pressing ALT+F4
keys on the keyboard.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 149 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5.6 Loading DVA Messages


The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router supports up to 68 DVA messages:
• DVA 1 to 64: standard DVA messages which can be routed by any routing mechanism
• DVA 65 to 68: Chime 1 to Chime 4
DVAs can be loaded from the VIPEDIA-12 DCT as described below. Alternatively, it is possible to load DVAs
from a terminal emulation program; see Section “6.2.5 Loading DVA Messages Using a Serial Connection”
(page 161).

1) The DVA loading operation may take several minutes and cannot be cancelled once started.
It takes about 30 minutes to load 68 DVA files (approx. 10 minutes of audio).
2) VIPEDIA-12’s processes will be disabled for the entire DVA loading process. Faults may be
reported by the other units in the PA/VA System.
3) Do not perform any operation on a unit that is loading DVAs.

Notes:

a) The DVA load function from the VIPEDIA-12 DCT will either clear all DVAs and load the required number
of DVA messages or add new DVAs into the selected VIPEDIA-12 unit.
b) Loading DVA into multiple units simultaneously may cause connection errors.
c) Not all 68 DVAs need to be present on the Micro-SD card.
d) The DVA load function from a terminal program gives more options for loading DVAs.

You will need:

a) The required DVA message files:


• 48 kHz, 24 kHz or 12 kHz 16 bit mono WAV files with total duration of up to:
- 10 minutes at 48 kHz
- 20 minutes at 24 kHz
- 40 minutes at 12 kHz
• Filename must be DVA_xx.wav, where xx is the DVA number from 01 to 64.
• ASL Technical Note U-Tech_Doc_0039 provides guidance on formatting DVA messages for the
Vipedia range of products.
b) A 4 GB SDHC Micro-SD card formatted with FAT32 file system.
Notes:
i) The VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA is supplied fitted with a Micro-SD card.
ii) The DVA message files must be in the root directory of the Micro-SD card.
c) The appropriate version of the PAVA System Configuration (PAVA SCT).
The required tools are available from ASL or an appointed ASL distributor.
d) The system configuration file (*.xml).
e) The IP address of the target VIPEDIA-12.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 150 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To load DVAs from the VIPEDIA-12 DCT:

1. Ensure all DVA messages have the correct format (see above) and that the total audio length does not
exceed 10 minutes.
2. For the required VIPEDIA-12 in the system:
a. Remove the unit’s Micro-SD card located on the rear panel of the Router as shown below.

Remove the Micro-SD card by lightly pushing the memory


card once.
Insert the Micro-SD card by carefully inserting the memory
card (with the terminal side facing down) into the slot until it
clicks into place.
Warnings:
When inserting or removing the memory card, be careful to
prevent the memory card from popping out and dropping.

18-40V 2A CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN AUDIO INPUTS AUDIO OUTPUTS


1-6 DBB IN 1 ETH 1 RS232 1-4 5-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 1

1
A

- IN +
B
2

18-40V 2A 7 - 12 µSD CARD DBB OUT 1 ETH 2 AMP CTRL 9-12 CONTROL 7 8 9 10 11 12 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 2
CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN

b. Copy the required DVA message files (including any custom chime) to the root directory of the
Micro-SD card.
c. Re-insert the Micro-SD card into the unit as shown above.
Rebooting the unit is not required – The Micro-SD card will automatically be remounted at the start
of the DVA loading operation.
3. Select the required VIPEDIA-12 from the drop-down list on the bottom-left corner of the VIPEDIA-12
DCT and then click the Load Unit DVA button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 151 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

• Erase All: if installing DVAs for the first time or if


replacing all existing DVAs.
All required DVAs must be on the Micro-SD card.
• Do not Erase All: if adding new DVAs.
Only new DVAs are required on the Micro-SD card.

Notes:
a) The erase option erases the DVAs on the target unit. It does not erase the DVA files on the Micro-
SD card.
b) If existing DVAs are erased, chimes are always generated at the end of the DVA loading operation:
• Standard chimes (Chime 1 to Chime 3) are automatically generated if custom chime files are not
present on the Micro-SD card as follows:
- DVA_65.wav replaces the standard single-note chime
- DVA_66.wav replaces the standard two-note descending overlapping pattern chime
- DVA_67.wav replaces the standard three-note descending overlapping pattern chime
c) Custom Chime 4 is generated from DVA_68.wav chime file. If DVA_68.wav file is not present on
the Micro-SD card, Chime 4 will not automatically be generated.
5. Enter the number of the last DVA to be loaded.
6. Select whether existing DVAs are to be erased.
7. Press OK to start the DVA loading operation.
Warnings:
a) The DVA loading operation takes several minutes and cannot be cancelled once started. It takes
about 30 minutes to load 68 DVA files (approx. 10 minutes of audio).
b) Do not perform any operation on a unit that is loading DVAs.
8. Repeat the above steps for other VIPEDIA-12 units as required.
9. The DVA Load dialog box will display a tab for each unit, and each tab will show the DVA loading
progress for that unit.
The DVA loading progress is also displayed on the VIPEDIA-12 front panel.
The example in Figure 58 (page 153) shows the DVA loading sequence when erasing and loading 68
DVAs.
The example in Figure 59 (page 155) shows the DVA loading sequence when adding 10 DVAs to a unit
that already has 10 DVAs.
The example in Figure 60 (page 157) shows an example of connection error during a DVA loading
operation.
Notes:
a) Loading DVA into multiple units simultaneously may cause connection errors.
b) VIPEDIA-12’s processes will be disabled for the entire DVA loading operation.
c) Faults may be reported by the other units in the PA/VA System.
d) INTERNAL ERROR may be briefly displayed on the unit’s front panel and the fault sounder
activated during the DVA loading.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 152 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

e) Faults will be cleared when the DVA loading operation is complete.


10. Wait for the DVA load operation to complete, and for each unit:
a. Ensure the unit has a valid configuration.
b. Check all installed DVA messages via the front panel menu option:
TestMonitorAudioInputsDVADVA nn
Notes:
i) It is not possible to monitor chimes via the front panel Test menu option.
ii) NA
c. If any of the installed DVAs is not played correctly or a fault is reported during the test, power cycle
the unit or reset the unit from the Firmware Transfer Tool (Fimware tab>Reset Router option) and
repeat the test.
If the error persists, repeat the DVA loading procedure.
Refer to “APPENDIX Q – Resetting a VIPEDIA-12 or a Network Card using the Firmware Transfer
Tool (FTT)” (page 219) for information on the Firmware Transfer Tool.
d. If a microphone is configured in the system with chime enabled, make a live announcement and
confirm that the chime is played correctly.
If case of any errors, power cycle the unit or reset the unit from the Firmware Transfer Tool and
repeat the test.

Figure 58 DVA loading progress (example): front panel and dialog box (erase all and load 68 DVAs)

DVA load – erase all and load 68 DVAs


Phase Front Panel DVA Load Dialog
NA NA

Start INSTALLING DVAs

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 153 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DVA load – erase all and load 68 DVAs


Phase Front Panel DVA Load Dialog
Erase ERASING ALL DVAS

Install INSTALLING DVAxx

Chime CHIME GENERATION IN PROGRESS


generation

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 154 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DVA load – erase all and load 68 DVAs


Phase Front Panel DVA Load Dialog
Complete The front panel should return to normal mode
when the DVA load and chime generation
operation has completed.
Scroll the DVA Load dialog box to check the
result for each DVA.

Figure 59 DVA loading progress (example): front panel and dialog box (do not erase all and add 10 DVAs)

DVA load – do not erase and add 10 DVAs


Phase Front Panel DVA Load Dialog
NA NA Unit has 10 DVAs and 10 DVAs are to be added. Therefore,
the last DVA is 20.

Start INSTALLING DVAs

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 155 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

DVA load – do not erase and add 10 DVAs


Phase Front Panel DVA Load Dialog
Install INSTALLING DVAxx

DVA1 to DVA10:
Error as already
loaded.

Complete The front panel should return to normal mode


when the DVA load has completed.
Scroll the DVA Load dialog box to check the
result for each DVA.

Failure due
to already
loaded DVA1
to DVA10

Operation successfully
completed: 10 DVAs loaded

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 156 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Figure 60 DVA loading connection error (example)

DVA load – connection error


Incomplete Check the target unit’s front panel.
(connection The DVA loading process should carry on until
error) completed.
The front panel should return to normal mode
when the DVA load and chime generation
operation has completed.
Notes:
a) Loading DVA into multiple units
simultaneously may cause connection
errors.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 157 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6 Maintenance

It is important that the PA/VA system is operated and maintained appropriately as a whole.
Section “6.1 Routine Maintenance” (page 158) summarises the routine maintenance procedures for the
VIPEDIA-12 when it is used as part of a Voice Alarm system that is compliant with BS 5839:8. Please refer
to BS 5839:8 and local Voice Alarm standards for detailed information on the required maintenance
procedures.
Section “6.2 Non-Routine Maintenance Tasks” (page 159) describes maintenance tasks that can be carried
when required.

Please read and observe the safety information guidelines available on the product and in
Section “Safety and Precaution” (page 7). Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may
cause personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
For INTEGRA, refer to the Maintenance section on the INTEGRA User’s Manual (U-0732-0051).

6.1 Routine Maintenance

6.1.1 Daily Attention

Each day, the VIPEDIA-12 should be checked for indication of normal operation as part of the fire alarm
system routine maintenance. If there is a remote indicator panel for the VA system, this should also be
checked.

6.1.2 Weekly Attention

On a weekly basis, the fire detection system should be activated and the VA system checked to ensure it
operates under alarm conditions. The VIPEDIA-12 should be checked for indication of normal operation and,
if there is a remote indicator panel for the VA system, this should also be checked.

6.1.3 Monthly Attention

If an automatically started emergency generator is used as part of the standby supply, then it should be
started up once each month by a simulation of a failure of the normal power supply. It should be allowed to
energise the fire alarm supply for a continuous period of at least 1 hour. The VIPEDIA-12 should be
monitored to identify any malfunctioning caused by the use of the generator.

6.1.4 Quarterly Inspection and Test

The following checks should be carried out every 3 months:


1. The service life of the internal RTC back-up battery should be checked and replaced if it exceeds
5 years; see Section 6.2.8 Replacing the Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery” (page 169) for instructions.
2. All fault indicators and their circuits should be checked, preferably by simulation of fault conditions.
3. The VIPEDIA-12 should be visually inspected for signs of moisture ingress and other deterioration.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 158 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6.1.5 Annual Inspection and Test

The following checks should be carried out every 3 years:


1. The inspection and test routines detailed in Section “6.1.4 Quarterly Inspection and Test” (page 158).
(Quarterly inspection and test)
2. A visual inspection should be made to confirm that all cable fittings and equipment are secure,
undamaged and adequately protected.

6.2 Non-Routine Maintenance Tasks


The following sections describe maintenance tasks that can be carried out when required.
The VIPEDIA-12’s preferred Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) is the whole unit.

6.2.1 Build Standard and Software Versions

It is important to know the Build Standard and software versions of your equipment for maintenance
purposes, and to ensure that the unit has the correct functions. The Build Standard version and the software
version should be quoted in all enquiries regarding the unit.
The Build Standard version is available on the unit’s barcode, and the software version is available from the
unit’s LCD display menu.

6.2.2 Serial Number Label and Build Standard Version

The serial number label of rack-mount units, such as the VIPEDIA-12, is located on the rear or side of the
unit; see example in Figure 61 (page 159).

Figure 61 VIPEDIA-12 serial number label example

The last section of the barcode after the second forward slash (/)
indicates the VIPEDIA-12Build Standard (BS) version.
Example: 1320/750640/02B  BS Version = 02

6.2.3 Software/Firmware Version

To check the VIPEDIA-12 software version:

The software version of all components of the VIPEDIA-12 are displayed via the following front panel menu
option:
ConfigurationRouterIdentityS/Ware
Refer to Table 4 (page 32) for details of each software/firmware component.

Notes:
a) The Host CP version is the VIPEDIA-12 software version.
b) The Host CP version should be quoted in all inquiries along with the version of the DSP, FPGA and
NETCARD VIPA (if a Network Card is fitted).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 159 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To view the software version of ASL tools:

The software version of ASL tools is displayed with the window title or via the menubar option HelpAbout.

6.2.4 Loading the VIPEDIA-12 and VIPEDIA-NET Firmware/Software

For EN 54-16 compliance changing the product firmware can only be done at access level 4
which must be restricted to persons trained and authorised by ASL to alter the firmware.
The Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures document (ASL 0641-3036) describes the
instructions to load the VIPEDIA-12 software. The document is available from ASL to trained and
authorised users.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 160 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6.2.5 Loading DVA Messages Using a Serial Connection

The following DVA load commands are available via serial connection.

Command Where “x” Where “y” Description


dva_load x y Number of highest DVA file 0 = Do Not Erase Existing Starts an optional chip-
to load (up to DVA68). Files. erase, followed by loading
1 = Erase All DVA files files from DVA1 up to the
before starting load. specified number.

dva_erase x y The number of the FIRST The number of DVA files to Removes DVA files from
DVA file to erase. erase. memory without erasing
the entire chip.
For example “dva_erase 5
2” will erase DVA files 5 &
6.
dva_files N/A N/A Prints a list of DVA files
and whether they are
currently installed.
Notes:
a) DSP versions prior to V2.0.0001 will only respond to the “dva_load x y” command, and do not support “dva_files”
or “dva_erase x y” commands.
b) DVA Files 65-68 are Chime files (1, 2, 3 and 4). Note that chimes 1-3 are auto-generated if missing, thus to
replace chime files, the instruction “dva_erase 65 3” will not work as expected, as the chimes will be re-generated
before the user has the chance to trigger the install of new DVA files. To replace chime files, reload the DVAs
with erase option, i.e., “dva_load x 1”.

a) The DVA loading operation may take several minutes and cannot be cancelled once started.
It takes about 30 minutes to load 68 DVA files (approx. 10 minutes of audio).
b) VIPEDIA-12’s processes will be disabled for the entire DVA loading process. Faults may be
reported by the other units in the PA/VA System.
c) Do not perform any operation on a unit that is loading DVAs.

Notes:
a) The erase option erases the DVAs on the target unit. It does not erase the DVA files on the Micro-SD
card.
b) If existing DVAs are erased, chimes are always generated at the end of the DVA loading operation:
• Standard chimes (Chime 1 to Chime 3) are automatically generated if custom chime files are not
present on the Micro-SD card as follows:
- DVA_65.wav replaces the standard single-note chime
- DVA_66.wav replaces the standard two-note descending overlapping pattern chime
- DVA_67.wav replaces the standard three-note descending overlapping pattern chime
c) Custom Chime 4 is generated from DVA_68.wav chime file. If DVA_68.wav file is not present on the
Micro-SD card, Chime 4 will not automatically be generated.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 161 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

You will need:

a) A configuration PC with a serial connection to the target unit; refer to “APPENDIX L – Connecting to a
VIPEDIA-12 Using Serial” (page 210) for instructions.
b) The required DVA message files:
• 48 kHz, 24 kHz or 12 kHz 16 bit mono WAV files with total duration of up to:
- 10 minutes at 48 kHz
- 20 minutes at 24 kHz
- 40 minutes at 12 kHz
• Filename must be DVA_xx.wav, where xx is the DVA number from 01 to 64.
• ASL Technical Note U-Tech_Doc_0039 provides guidance on formatting DVA messages for the
Vipedia range of products.
c) A 4 GB SDHC Micro-SD card formatted with FAT32 file system.
Notes:
i) The VIPEDIA-12 is supplied fitted with a Micro-SD card.
ii) The DVA message files must be in the root directory of the Micro-SD card.

To load or replace DVA messages:

1. Connect the VIPEDIA-12 RS232 port to a serial port of the PC as described in “APPENDIX L
– Connecting to a VIPEDIA-12 Using Serial” (page 210).
2. Remove the unit’s Micro-SD card located on the rear panel as shown below.

Remove the Micro-SD card by lightly pushing the memory


card once.
Insert the Micro-SD card by carefully inserting the memory
card (with the terminal side facing down) into the slot until it
clicks into place.
Warnings:
When inserting or removing the memory card, be careful to
prevent the memory card from popping out and dropping.

18-40V 2A CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN AUDIO INPUTS AUDIO OUTPUTS


1-6 DBB IN 1 ETH 1 RS232 1-4 5-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 1

1
A

- IN +
B
2

18-40V 2A 7 - 12 µSD CARD DBB OUT 1 ETH 2 AMP CTRL 9-12 CONTROL 7 8 9 10 11 12 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 2
CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN

3. Copy the required DVA message files (including any custom chime) to the root directory of the Micro-SD
card.
4. Re-insert the Micro-SD card into the unit as shown above.
Rebooting the unit is not required – The Micro-SD card will automatically be remounted at the start of
the DVA loading operation.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 162 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5. On the terminal emulator window, press ENTER to


obtain a “>” prompt.

6. If replacing one or more DVA files, first erase the


existing DVAs by entering the “dva_erase x y”
command.
Where:
• x indicates the number of the FIRST DVA file to
erase.
• y indicates the number of DVA files to erase.

7. Enter the required load command: “dva_load x y”.


Where:
• x indicates the number of DVA files to be loaded,
up to a maximum of 68.
• y = 0 if existing DVA files are to be kept, for
example when replacing one or more DVA files or
when adding new DVA files
• y =1 if all existing files are to be deleted.
Warnings:
a) The DVA loading operation takes several minutes
and cannot be cancelled once started. It takes
about 30 minutes to load 68 DVA files (approx.
10 minutes of audio).
b) VIPEDIA-12’s processes will be disabled for the
entire DVA loading process. Faults may be
reported by the other units in the PA/VA System.
c) Do not perform any operation on a unit that is
loading DVAs.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 163 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

8. The command will return:


• “status 2” when deleting
• “status 3” when creating space
• “status 4” when ready to start writing a file
• “status 6” when file load finished
• “status 0” when finished
• “Generating Chimes” after processing all
requested DVA files
The VIPEDIA-12 front panel will display the relevant
messages:
• ERASING ALL DVAS
• INSTALLING DVAxx
• CHIME GENERATION IN PROGRESS
Notes:
a) Faults may be reported by the other units in the
PA/VA System.
b) INTERNAL ERROR may be briefly displayed on
the unit’s front panel and the fault sounder
activated during the DVA loading.
c) Faults will be cleared when the DVA loading
operation is complete.
9. Wait for the DVA loading process to complete:
xx DVAs successfully loaded and chimes generated.
If fewer number of DVAs are successfully loaded than
in the DVA load request, an error occurred during the
DVA load operation. Reboot the unit and repeat the
DVA loading command but without deleting the
existing DVA files:
• To reboot the unit: enter “reboot”.
• To load the DVA files: enter “dva_load nn 0”
where nn indicates the number of DVA files to be
loaded.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 164 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

10. Check that the required DVA files and chimes have
been loaded by entering the “dva_files” command.
If there is any missing DVA file, reboot the unit and
repeat the DVA loading command but without deleting
the existing DVA files:
• To reboot the unit: enter “reboot”.
• To load the DVA files: enter “dva_load nn 0”
where nn indicates the number of DVA files to be
loaded.

11. Ensure the unit has a valid configuration.


12. Check all installed DVA messages via the front panel menu option:
TestMonitorAudioInputsDVADVA nn
Note that It is not possible to monitor chimes via the front panel Test menu option.
13. If any of the installed DVAs is not played correctly or a fault is reported during the test, power cycle the
unit or reset the unit from the Firmware Transfer Tool (Fimware tab>Reset Router option) and repeat
the test.
If the error persists, repeat the DVA loading procedure.
Refer to “APPENDIX Q – Resetting a VIPEDIA-12 or a Network Card using the Firmware Transfer Tool
(FTT)” (page 219) for information on the Firmware Transfer Tool.
14. If a microphone is configured in the system with chime enabled, make a live announcement and confirm
that the chime is played correctly.
If case of any errors, power cycle the unit or reset the unit from the Firmware Transfer Tool and repeat
the test.
15. Disconnect the serial cable from the target VIPEDIA-12 unit once the DVA load is complete.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 165 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6.2.6 Resetting the Front Panel Access Code (PIN) to Factory Default

The front panel access code is part of the dynamic configuration and is reset to factory default by resetting
the dynamic configuration to factory default as described in in Section “6.2.7 Resetting the VIPEDIA-12
Dynamic and or Static Configuration to Factory Default” (page 166).

6.2.7 Resetting the VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic and or Static Configuration to Factory


Default

The Router static system configuration contains system and site-specific configuration that is unlikely to
change frequently.
The Router dynamic configuration contains site-specific configuration that is expected to change on a routine
basis. The most significant part of this configuration contains the various audio settings and all those
parameters that would be updated during commissioning including the front panel parameters. All
parameters configured from the unit’s front panel (except for the IP settings) and by the use to the VIPEDIA-
12 Dynamic Configuration Tool reside in the dynamic configuration.
The configuration on VIPEDIA-12 can be reset to factory default from the front panel or by using the DIP
switch(es) on the Router board.
The ability to reset the VIPEDIA-12 static and/or dynamic configuration from the front panel is provided on
Routers that have the following firmware and DIP switch setting:
• UI CP firmware version V2.1.27 or later; see Section “4.8.5 Verifying the Software Version” (page 32).
• DIP switch 3 on the Router board enabled (down).

Notes:

a) The above UI CP firmware and DIP switch setting are factory default on recent builds of the VIPEDIA-12.
b) The IP settings will not be reset to factory default when the dynamic or static configuration is reset.
c) The unit’s ID and the front panel access code will be reset to factory default when the dynamic
configuration is reset to factory default.

6.2.7.1 Resetting the Dynamic and/or Static Configuration to Factory Default from the Front
Panel

Notes:

a) The IP settings will not be reset to factory default when the dynamic or static configuration is reset.
b) The unit’s ID and the front panel access code will be reset to factory default when the dynamic
configuration is reset to factory default.

Warnings:

a) The VIPEDIA-12 unit should be re-commissioned after a dynamic/static configuration reset.


b) This product contains static-sensitive devices. Observe ESD precautions when handling this product with
the lid removed.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 166 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To reset the Router Dynamic and/or Static Configuration to factory default from the front panel:

1. Make note of the unit’s front panel settings.


• Unit ID: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityId
• Unit UTC offset: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityUTC offset
2. Power the cycle the unit.
3. Press the required combination of front panel keys while “Initialising – please wait …” is displayed on
the front panel:
 (left arrow) + DEFAULT + AUDIO MON to clear the dynamic configuration only.
 (down arrow) + DEFAULT + AUDIO MON to clear the static configuration only.
 (right arrow) + DEFAULT + AUDIO MON to clear the dynamic AND the static configurations.
4. “Erasing config”, “Erasing NVM” or “Erasing NVM & config” will be displayed on the front panel.
5. To cancel the operation, press the FAULT CLEAR key on the front panel while “Initialising – please
wait …” is displayed on the front panel.
6. Wait for the VIPEDIA-12 to start up.
7. Power the cycle the unit.
8. Re-commission the unit as required.

6.2.7.2 Resetting the Dynamic and/or Static Configuration to Factory Default Using the DIP
Switches on the Router Board

Notes:

a) The IP settings will not be reset to factory default when the dynamic or static configuration is reset.
b) The unit’s ID and the front panel access code will be reset to factory default when the dynamic
configuration is reset to factory default.

Warnings:

a) The VIPEDIA-12 unit should be re-commissioned after a dynamic/static configuration reset.


b) This product contains static-sensitive devices. Observe ESD precautions when handling this product with
the lid removed.

You will need:

• Pozidriv screwdriver (No. 3).


• A small flat-bladed screwdriver.

To reset the dynamic and/or static configuration using DIP Switches 1 and 2:

1. Extract the commissioned audio settings from the unit into a file using the Audio Settings Manager; see
Section “5.5 Extracting and Injecting Audio Settings to/from a File” (page 147).
Clearly name the audio settings CSV file.
2. Make note of the unit’s front panel settings.
• Unit ID: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityId
• Unit UTC offset: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityUTC offset

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 167 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

(1 x screw on the
left-hand side of the unit)

3. Power down the unit from the central


rack.
4. If required, disconnect the wiring
from the VIPEDIA-12 unit and
remove the unit from the rack.
M3x4 Pozi countersunk screw
5. Remove the lid by undoing 10 x M3
screws.

6. The DIP switch is located on the


front right-hand side of the unit.
7. Set the required DIP switch down as ATTENTION
follows: Observe precautions for DIP SWITCH
handling electrostatic
a) To reset the dynamic sensitive devices.
configuration, set DIP switch
SW 1 down. SW 1

b) To reset the static


configuration, set DIP switch
SW 2 down.
8. Ensure the switch(es) is(are) fully
pushed down.
9. Power up the unit.
10. Wait for the unit to start up.
11. Ensure DIP switches SW 1 and
SW 2 are up.
12. Ensure the switch(es) is(are) fully
pushed up.
13. Power cycle the unit.
14. Re-fit the lid; see above.
15. If required, reconnect the wiring from
the VIPEDIA-12 unit and re-fit the
unit into the rack.
16. Re-commission the unit as required.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 168 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6.2.8 Replacing the Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery on VIPEDIA-12

You will need:

• Pozidriv screwdriver (No. 3).


• A small flat-bladed screwdriver.

Warning:

1) Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.


2) Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire etc.
3) This product contains static-sensitive devices. Observe ESD precautions when handling this product with
the lid removed.

To replace the RTC battery:

(1 x screw on the
left-hand side of the unit)

1. Power down the unit from the central


rack.
2. If required, disconnect the wiring
from the VIPEDIA-12 unit and
remove the unit from the rack.
M3x4 Pozi countersunk screw
3. Remove the lid by undoing 10 x M3
screws.

4. The battery holder is located on the front


right-hand side of the unit. CR2032
Battery
5. Remove the battery from its clip taking
care not to short circuit it.
6. Replace with type CR2032 or equivalent.

Do not dispose of battery in a fire.


Dispose of battery carefully to
avoid environmental damage by
following WEEE protocols.

7. Re-fit the lit; see above.


8. If required, reconnect the wiring from the ATTENTION
VIPEDIA-12 unit and re-fit the unit into the Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic
rack. sensitive devices.

9. Power the unit on from the equipment rack.


10. Adjust the date and time as required:
ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityDate/Time
11. Clear faults by pressing the FAULT CLEAR key on the unit’s front panel.
12. Ensure no faults are reported.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 169 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6.2.9 Replacing a VIPEDIA-12 Unit

You will need:

• A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
• The VIPEDIA-12 firmware file(s) in the required version.
• The required VIPEDIA-12 DVA message files.
• The PAVA SCT system configuration file (XML).
If not available, the configuration can be extracted from the old unit using the File Transfer Tool.
• The audio settings file (CSV) for the VIPEDIA-12 target unit.
If not available, the configuration can be extracted from the old unit using the Audio Settings Manager.
• The VIPEDIA-12 target unit’s front panel settings:
- Unit IP Address: ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigIP Addr
- Gateway Address: ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigGateway Addr
- Subnet Mask: ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigSubnet Mask
- Unit ID: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityId
- Unit UTC offset: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityUTC offset
- Frame Learn Check fault: FaultsSystemLearn Check
- The front panel access code for the target unit
• If a Network Card (VIPEDIA-NET) is fitted:
- The VIPEDIA-NET firmware file in the required version.
- The VIPEDIA-NET IP address and hostname.
- The VCT configuration file (CFG).
If not available, the configuration can be extracted from the old unit using the VIPA Config Tool.
- The DVA message files stored in /dva/msgs/dist/.
- WinSCP or other SFTP for Microsoft Windows.
• The Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures document (U-0641-3036).
• Tools (a small flat-bladed screwdriver, Pozidriv screwdriver No. 3).
• The VIPEDIA-12 Installation Guide (U-0641-0344) (optional).
• A power supply (22 V to 40 V) for the new unit.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 170 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Preparing the new VIPEDIA-12 unit before installation into the rack:

Ensure that the new VIPEDIA-12 unit is not connected to a network containing other device set
with same IP address (current and new).

1. Power the new VIPEDIA-12 up.


2. Check the VIPEDIA-12 firmware version number via the front panel menu option:
ConfigurationRouterIdentityS/Ware
If required, install the required Host CP, DSP and FPGA software.
Refer to the Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures document (U-0641-3036).
3. If a Network Card is fitted follow the instructions below:
a. Assign the old Network Card IP address and hostname and load the configuration into the new
Network Card.
Refer to the Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures document (U-0641-3036).
b. Check the Network Card firmware version.
If required, install the required NET-VIPA firmware, and then reload the configuration.
Refer to the Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures document (U-0641-3036).
c. Copy the DVA files to the new Network Card /dva/msgs/dist/ folder using WinSCP.
4. Assign the old VIPEDIA-12 unit’s front panel settings to the new unit and adjust the date and time as
required:
• Unit IP Address: ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigIP Addr
• Gateway Address: ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigGateway Addr
• Subnet Mask: ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigSubnet Mask
• Unit ID: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityId
• Unit UTC offset: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityUTC offset
• Access codes: ConfigurationAccessChange-PIN
• Date and time: ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityDate/Time
5. Load the system configuration (XML) of the old VIPEDIA-12 unit into the new unit.
Refer to the Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures document (U-0641-3036).
6. Download the audio settings (CSV) of the old VIPEDIA-12 unit into the new unit using the Audio
Settings Manager; see Section “5.5 Extracting and Injecting Audio Settings to/from a File” (page 147).
7. Load the DVA messages into the VIPEDIA-12 unit; see Section “5.6 Loading DVA Messages”
(page 150).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 171 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Replacing the old VIPEDIA-12 unit:

1. Ensure the power supply to the old unit is switched off.


2. Disconnect all external wiring and remove the old unit from the rack.
3. Install the new unit into the rack and connect the external wiring; refer to the VIPEDIA-12 Installation
Guide if required.
4. Power the new unit on.
5. Perform a frame learn:
Frame Learn Check fault: FaultsFramesLearn
6. Clear faults by pressing the FAULT CLEAR key on the unit’s front panel.
7. Confirm that the system operates correctly and fault free.
8. If the old unit is to be returned for repair, pack the unit following the recommendations described in
Section “6.2.10 Packing for Return for Repair” (page 172).
9. If the old unit is to be disposed of, the unit should be disposed of by following WEEE protocols.

6.2.10 Packing for Return for Repair

All electronics assemblies must be properly packed in ESD protective packing for transport, to prevent
physical and ESD damage.
The filler material used for packing for return for repair must be antistatic or static dissipative, as this may
come into contact with exposed connectors, wiring, or PCB assemblies. The use of non-conductive filler
material may cause damage to the electronic assemblies reducing their operational life, or even destroying
them.
Advice on packing the product for return can be provided by ASL.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 172 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

7 Acronyms

AC Alternating Current
AEL Active End of Line Device (ASL)
ANS Ambient Noise Sensor (ASL)
ASL Application Solutions (Safety and Security) Limited
BMB01 Remote I/O Unit (ASL)
BOA Break-Out Adaptor (ASL)
BS Build Standard
British Standard
BS Build Standard
CAN Controller Area Network
CFG Configuration file extension
CP Control Processor
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSV Comma Separated Value
DBB Digital BackBone
DC Direct Current
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DST Daylight Saving Time
DVA Digital Voice Announcer
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference
EN European Standards
EOL10K End Of Line Resistor
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
FTT File Transfer Tool (ASL)
GPIO General Purpose Inputs/Outputs
GPS Global Positioning System
GUI Graphical User Interface
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEL01 Intelligent End of Line Device (ASL)
ILP02 Induction Loop Panel (ASL)
IP Internet Protocol
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSZDC V2000/INTEGRA Surveillance Interface Card
NVC Night Time Volume Control
NVM Non-Volatile Memory
PA/VA Public Address/Voice Alarm
PAVA Public Address and Voice Alarm
PAVA SCT PAVA System Configuration Tool (ASL)
PC Personal Computer
PMC Portable Media Carrier (ASL’s audio over IP format)

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 173 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

RAM Random-Access Memory


RCB01 Changeover Relay Box (ASL)
RMS Root Mean Square
RTC Real Time Clock
SDHC Secure Digital High Capacity
SDK Software Development Kit
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable transceiver
SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol
SIP Session Initiation Protocol
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface Bus
SSH Secure Shell
TDM Time-Division multiplexing
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
UI User Interface
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
V2000 Modular Amplifier Frame (ASL)
V2000 DCT V2000 Dynamic Configuration Tool (ASL)
V2000-STBY V2000/INTEGRA Standby Interface Card
V400 Amplifier Frame (ASL)
VA Voice Alarm
VCT VIPA Config Tool (ASL)
VIPA ASL’s software stack for IP-enabled PA/VA products (ASL)
VIPA SIL VIPA Simple Interface Library
VIPEDIA-12 ASL Audio Router
VIPEDIA-12 DCT VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool (ASL)
VIPEDIA-NET VIPEDIA-12 Network Card
X400 Multi-channel Amplifier Frame (ASL)
XML Extensible Markup Language

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 174 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

8 Reference Documentation

Table 21 Reference documents

Ref. No Title Filename Ref Origin


[1] Audio Settings Manager Quick Guide U-0701-0014 ASL
[2] Dante Configuration Guide Vipedia-Dante-Config-Guide ASL
[3] DVA Mastering Guide U-Tech_Doc_0039 ASL
[4] Firmware and Configuration Load Procedures U-0641-3036 ASL
[5] IEL01 Installation Guide U-0733-0057 ASL
[6] ILP02 User’s Manual (2) U-0398-0812 ASL
[7] INTEGRA Installation Guide U-0732-0025 ASL
[8] INTEGRA User’s Manual U-0732-0051 ASL
[9] PAVA System Configuration Tool User’s Manual (2) U-0701-1583 ASL
[10] SIP Configuration Guide U-0701-1497 ASL
[11] V2000 Installation Guide U-0623-0291 ASL
[12] V2000 User’s Manual (2) U-0623-1005 ASL
[13] V400 Amplifier Handbook 398A_Amp_ Handbook ASL
[14] V400 Installation Guide U-0398-0607 ASL
[15] VIPA Microphone and Vipedia Contact Input (2) U-0582-4379 ASL
[16] VIPEDIA-12 Installation Guide U-0641-0344 ASL
[17] VIPEDIA-12 Redundancy Configuration Guide (2) U-0641-3090 ASL
[18] VIPEDIA-12-TS Installation Guide U-0641-3067 ASL
[19] X400 Product Manual U-0629-0170 ASL

(1) Additional reference information is available from ASL’s website: www.asl-control.co.uk



(2) Not yet available at the time of publication of this document.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 175 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX A – PC Requirements

The PC used for firmware and configuration update should meet the following requirements for correct
operation of ASL configuration tools.

1. The operating system on the configuration PC must be Windows 7 (or later).


2. The configuration PC must have an Ethernet connection to the target unit.
Do not connect the configuration PC to a mirror port of network switch.
Alternatively, the configuration PC can be directly connected to an Ethernet port on target unit.
3. The configuration PC’s network interface that is used to connect to the target unit must have an IP
address in the same subnet as the target unit.

To change the configuration PC’s IP address:

a. Click the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your


screen.
b. Enter “ncpa.cpl” in the Search box and double-click the
ncpa.cpl program.
Interface connected
to the target unit

c. The Network Connections window will be displayed.


d. In the Network Connections window, right-click the
interface that is used to connect to the target unit, and
then select Properties from the popup menu.

e. The Properties window for the interface card will be


displayed.
f. Select the Networking tab and then select Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the connections list.
g. Click the Properties button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 176 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

h. The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)


Properties window will be displayed.
i. Click the Use the following IP Address option and
enter the configuration PC’s IP address.
Ensure the PC’s IP address is in the same subnet as
the target unit.
In the example on the right:
• Target units in a 192.168.1.0/24 network (factory
default for ASL PA/VA equipment)
• Configuration PC on a free address in the same
subnet (e.g. 192.168.1.63)
j. Enter the required Subnet mask or press the TAB key
on the keyboard (Windows will set the default subnet
mask).
k. Click the OK button to apply the changes.

Multiple IP addresses can be assigned to a single network


interface. This is normally used when the configuration PC
is required to connect to units in different subnets, for
example, when new “out of the box” units are configured
with IP address outside the factory default subnet
(192.168.1.0/24).
To assign multiple IP addresses to a network interface:
a. Re-load the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
Properties window.
b. Click the Advanced button.
c. Click the Add button on the Advanced TCP/IP
Settings window.
d. Enter the configuration PC’s IP address in the new
subnet.
In the example on the right:
• Target units in a 10.1.1.0/24 network
• Configuration PC on a free address in the same
subnet (e.g. 10.1.1.100)
e. Enter the required Subnet mask or press the TAB key
on the keyboard (Windows will set the default subnet
mask).
f. Click the Add button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 177 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4. If the configuration PC has multiple network interfaces, ensure the network interface used to connect to
the target unit has the highest priority by changing the binding order and metrics; see below.
Alternatively, the other network interfaces can be temporarily disabled.

To change the Binding Order (Windows 7 only):

a. If the Network Connections window is not opened,


click the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your
screen.
• Type “ncpa.cpl” in the Search box, and double-
click the ncpa.cpl program.
• The Network Connections window will be
displayed.

b. In the Network Connections window press the ALT


key on the keyboard to enable the top-level menu.
c. Select Advanced>Advanced Settings from the top-
level menu.

d. The Advanced Settings window will be displayed; see


example on the right.
e. Select the Adapters and Bindings tab.
f. In the Connections section select the interface that is
used to connect to the target unit, and then move it to
the top of the list.
g. Click the OK button to apply the changes.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 178 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

Interface connected
to the target unit

To change the Interface Metrics:

a. In the Network Connections window right-click the


interface that is used to connect to the target unit, and
then select Properties from the popup menu.

b. The Properties window for the interface card will be


displayed.
c. Select the Networking tab and then select Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the connections list.
d. Click the Properties button.

e. The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)


Properties window will be displayed.
f. Click the Advanced button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 179 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

g. The Advanced TCP/IP Settings window will be


displayed; see example on the right.
h. Select the IP Settings tab.
i. If checked, uncheck the Automatic metric check box.
j. Set the Interface metric to “1”.
k. Click the OK button to apply the changes.
l. Repeat the above procedure for all other network
interfaces ensuring that they are set to a lower priority
(value > 1), and not set to automatic.

5. Ensure that the target unit is up running and connected to


the network, for example, using the “ping” command in a
Command Prompt.
Target unit with IP address 192.168.1.10 is
a. Click the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your up running and connected to the network

screen.
b. Enter “cmd” in the Search box and double-click the
cmd.exe program.
c. In the Command Prompt, enter the “ping” command
followed by the IP address of the target unit.
For example:
ping 192.168.1.10

Target unit with IP address 192.168.1.20


is not connected to the network

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 180 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX B – Installing the PAVA System Configuration Tool


(PAVA SCT)

The PAVA System Configuration Tool contains the following applications:


• System configuration generator (XML)
• File Transfer Tool
• VIPEDIA-12 Dynamic Configuration Tool (VIPEDIA-12 DCT)
• V2000 Dynamic Configuration Tool (V2000 DCT)

You will need:

• A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
• A copy of the installer of the appropriate version of the PAVA SCT Tool which is available from ASL or
an appointed ASL distributor.
As standard, the installer filename has the following format:
Install_PAVA_SCT_<version>.exe

To install the PAVA SCT:

1. Double-click Install_PAVA_SCT_<version>.exe to launch the installer.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 181 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

2. The installer Click the Next button to continue the installation.

3. Read the license agreement, select the I accept … option and then click the Next button.

4. Change the installation directory (if required) and then click the Next button.

Click here to change the


installation directory

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 182 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5. Click the Install button.

6. The installation will start.

7. A command prompt will show the Windows firewall update progress. Press any key when complete.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 183 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

8. The PAVA SCT installation will complete.


Select whether PAVA SCT is to be launched and then click the Finish button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 184 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX C – Installing the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT)

The ASL Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT) is a stand-alone version of the ASL Transfer Tool with firmware
update function.

You will need:

• A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
• A copy of the installer of the appropriate version of the Firmware Transfer Tool which is available from
ASL or an appointed ASL distributor.
As standard, the installer filename has the following format:
Install_FTT_<version>.exe

To install the FTT:

1. Double-click Install_FTT_<version>.exe to launch the installer.

2. The installer Click the Next button to continue the installation.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 185 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

3. Read the license agreement, select the I accept … option and then click the Next button.

4. Change the installation directory (if required) and then click the Next button.

Click here to change the


installation directory

5. Click the Install button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 186 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6. The installation will start.

7. A command prompt will show the Windows firewall update progress. Press any key when complete.

8. The FTT installation will complete.


Select whether FTT is to be launched and then click the Finish button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 187 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

9. Click the Exit button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 188 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX D – Installing the VIPA Config Tool (VCT)

The VIPA Config Tool (VCT) enables the configuration of IP networks of ASL VIPA devices (iPA400,
iPAM400, VIPET, Linutop, VIPA Servers, and VIPEDIA-NET Network Card). It is also used to update the
firmware on VIPA devices.

You will need:

• A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
The settings for binding order and interface metrics are not required for the VCT.
• A copy of the installer of the appropriate version of the VCT which is available from ASL or an appointed
ASL distributor.
As standard, the installer filename has the following format:
vipa-config-<version>.exe

To install the VCT:

1. Double-click vipa-config-<version>.exe to launch the installer.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 189 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

2. The installer Click the Next button to continue the installation.

3. Change the installation directory (if required) and then click the Next button.

Click here to change the


installation directory

4. Click the Start button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 190 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

5. The installation will start.

6. The Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable Maintenance dialog will be displayed.


Select the Repair … option and the click the Next button.

7. The Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable repair will start.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 191 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

8. Wait for the repair to complete and the click the Finish button.

9. The VCT installation will complete.


Select whether VCT is to be launched and then click the Next button.

10. Click the Exit button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 192 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX E – Installing and Launching the Update Manager


Tool

The Update Manager tool enables the software and configuration load into VIPEDIA-12, V2000, INTEGRA
(Router and Amplifier Frame) and IP microphones attached to the VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Router.

Notes:

a) The Update Manager tool does not explicitly show INTEGRA units, and the following convention applies:
• VIPEDIA-12 = INTEGRA Router
• V2000 = INTEGRA Amplifier Frame
b) The Update Manager tool supports the update of multiple units in parallel.
However, notice that single unit update by hardware component is recommended as it isolates the
problem when the update fails.
c) The Network Card update is not currently supported by the Update Manager tool.
Use the Network Card Manager tool to update the Network Card; see Section “APPENDIX F – Installing
and Launching the Network Card Manager Tool” (page 196).
d) The system configuration (*.xml) is not loaded into the Network Card. Therefore, the system
configuration must be loaded using the PAVA SCT/FTT if a Network Card is fitted to the VIPEDIA-
12/INTEGRA Router.

You will need:

• A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
• The configuration PC installed with the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT); see “APPENDIX C – Installing the
Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT)” (page 185).
• A copy of the executable file of the Update Manager tool which is available from ASL or an appointed
ASL distributor.
As standard, the executable filename has the following format:
UpdateManager.exe

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 193 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

To install and launch the Update Manager tool :

1. The Update Manager tool does not require installation.


2. Ensure the configuration PC has an Ethernet connection to the target unit; see “APPENDIX A – PC
Requirements” (page 176).
3. Launch the Update Manager tool by double-clicking the executable file:
UpdateManager.exe
4. Click the Yes button on the firewall update confirmation dialog(s) to start the application.

5. Before attempt to update any device check the Update Manager as follows.
a. Ensure that an FTT (Firmware Transfer Tool) is associated to the Update Manager and it is not
blocked by the firewall.

If blank, install the appropriate


version of the Firmware Transfer
Tool and re-launch the Update
Manager.

If blocked by the firewall, re-launch the Update


Manager Tool and click on Yes button on the
firewall update confirmation dialog(s).

Note:
a) Hover over the error icon to show the tooltip.
b) NA

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 194 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

b. Ensure that Router Host Processor, Amplifier Frame Controller and MPS update are not blocked by
the firewall by loading a main application (VIPEDIA-12 HCP, V2000 Frame or MPS Image).

If blocked by the firewall, re-launch the


Update Manager Tool and click on Yes button
on the firewall update confirmation dialog(s).
Note:
a) Hover over the error icon to show the
tooltip.
b) NA

6. If a firewall update confirmation dialog is displayed after clicking the Update button, click the Yes
button. Otherwise, the update will fail.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 195 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX F – Installing and Launching the Network Card


Manager Tool

The Network Card Manager tool enables the software and configuration load into Network Cards.

You will need:

• A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
• A copy of the executable file of the Network Card Manager tool which is available from ASL or an
appointed ASL distributor.
As standard, the executable filename has the following format:
NetworkCardManager.exe

To install and launch the Network Card Manager tool:

1. The Network Card Manager tool does not require installation.


2. Ensure the configuration PC has an Ethernet connection to the target unit; see “APPENDIX A – PC
Requirements” (page 176).
3. Launch the Network Card Manager tool by double-clicking the executable file:
NetworkCardManager.exe

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 196 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX G – Launching the PAVA System Configuration Tool


(PAVA SCT)

The PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) enables the configuration of a PA/VA system comprised
of ASL VIPEDIA-12 Audio Routers, INTEGRA Routers, Amplifier Frames (V400, X400 and/or V2000) and
peripherals (such as MPS/EMS microphones and BMB01 Remote I/O Units).
The PAVA SCT is launched as described below.

You will need:

A configuration PC installed with the PAVA SCT; see “APPENDIX B – Installing the PAVA System
Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT)” (page 181).

To launch the PAVA SCT:

1. Launch the PAVA SCT by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen and then
select the following option.
All ProgramsASLPAVA System Configuration ToolPAVA SCT <version>System
Configuration Tool <version>

Or by double-click the application’s icon on the desktop .

2. To create a new configuration file, click on the icon on the toolbar.


Or select FileNew from the menubar.
Or Press Ctrl+N on the keyboard.
A standard, it will be named Untitled.xml.
3. To load a configuration file:
a. Click on the icon on the toolbar.
Or select FileOpen from the menubar.
Or press Ctrl+O on the keyboard.
A standard Windows File Open dialog is displayed.
b. Locate and select the required configuration file (XML).
Alternatively, select the required file from File<Recent Files>.
4. To save the current configuration file:

a. Click on the icon on the toolbar.


Or select FileSave from the menubar.
Or press Ctrl+S on the keyboard.
b. If it is an existing configuration, current configuration file will overwrite the existing file.
c. If it is a new configuration, the Windows File Save dialog is displayed.
d. Select the required location.
e. Enter a filename.
f. Click on Save.
5. To save a copy of the current configuration file:

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 197 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

a. Click on the icon on the toolbar:


Or select FileSave As… from the menubar.
Or press Ctrl+Shift+S on the keyboard.
A standard, the Windows File Save dialog is displayed.
b. Select the required location.
c. Enter a filename.
d. Click on Save.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 198 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX H – Launching the ASL Transfer Tool (from the


PAVA SCT)

The ASL Transfer Tool is a subset of the ASL Firmware Transfer Tool. It is used to load the XML
configuration file into theVIPEDIA-12, V2000 and.
The ASL Transfer Tool is part of the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) and is launched as
described below.

You will need:

A configuration PC installed with the PAVA SCT; see “APPENDIX B – Installing the PAVA System
Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT)” (page 181).

Warnings:

It will not be possible to change the configuration whilst the ASL Transfer Tool is opened. This is to ensure
that the configuration loaded into the ASL Transfer Tool is the same as the configuration loaded into the
PAVA SCT.

To launch the Transfer Tool:

1. Ensure the configuration PC has an Ethernet connection to the target unit; see “APPENDIX A – PC
Requirements” (page 176).
2. First launch the PAVA SCT by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen and then
selecting the following option.
All ProgramsASLPAVA System Configuration ToolPAVA SCT <version>System
Configuration Tool <version>

Or by double-click the application’s icon on the desktop .


3. Load the system configuration into the PAVA SCT.
a. Click on the icon on the toolbar.
Or select FileOpen from the menubar.
Or press Ctrl+O on the keyboard.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 199 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

b. A browser window will be opened. Navigate to system configuration file to be uploaded (*.xml).

c. Click the Open button.


4. Select the PC network interface used to connect to the PA/VA system.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 200 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

a. Ensure that the required network interface is connected to the PA/VA system network.
b. Select PreferencesNetwork Connections from the menubar.

c. Select the required network interface, and then click the Ok button.

Note that only active network interfaces are


displayed for selection.
If the required network interface is not displayed,
check the network connection between the PC
and the PA/VA system. Also ensure that the
target PA/VA units are powered on. Close and re-
load the Network Adapter selection dialog box.

5. Double-click the Transfer Tool application’s icon on the toolbar.


Or select the ToolsASL Transfer Tool menubar option:
Notes:
a) The Transfer Tool will not be launched if it detects unsaved changes to the configuration file.
This is to ensure that the configuration loaded into the ASL Transfer Tool is the same as the
configuration loaded into the PAVA SCT.
b) If no network interface has been selected or the selected interface is inactive, the Network Adapter
selection dialog box will be displayed as described above.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 201 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6. The Transfer Tool is launched with the configuration PC network interface automatically set.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 202 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX I – Launching the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT)

The ASL Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT) is a stand-alone version of the ASL Transfer Tool with firmware
update function. It is used to load the FPGA and/or DSP firmware and the XML configuration file into
VIPEDIA-12, V2000 and INTEGRA units.
The Firmware Transfer Tool is launched as described below.

You will need:

A configuration PC installed with the Firmware Transfer Tool; see “APPENDIX C – Installing the Firmware
Transfer Tool (FTT)” (page 185).

To launch the Firmware Transfer Tool:

1. Launch the Firmware Transfer Tool by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen
and then selecting the following option.
All ProgramsASLFirmware Transfer ToolFTT (<version>)Firmware Transfer Tool
(<version>)

Or by double-clicking the application’s icon on the desktop .


2. Select the PC network interface used to connect to the PA/VA system.
Ensure that the required network interface is connected to the PA/VA system network; see “APPENDIX
A – PC Requirements” (page 176).

3. Select the required tab and follow the instructions provided in the above sections.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 203 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX J – Launching the VIPA Config Tool (VCT) and


Loading a Configuration File

You will need:

• A configuration PC installed with the VIPA Config Tool; see “Installing the VIPA Config Tool (VCT)”
(page 189).
• The Network Card configuration file (*.cfg).

To launch the VCT and load a configuration file:

1. Ensure the configuration PC has an Ethernet connection to the target unit; see “APPENDIX A – PC
Requirements” (page 176).
2. Launch the VCT by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen and then selecting
the following option.
All ProgramsASL VIPA Config ToolVIPA Config Tool <version>VIPA Config Tool

Or by double-clicking the application’s icon on the desktop .


3. Select FileOpen option on the menubar or toolbar to load the Network Card configuration (*.cfg).

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 204 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4. A browser window will be opened. Navigate to configuration file to be uploaded (*.cfg).

5. Click the Open button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 205 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX K – Launching the V2000 Dynamic Configuration


Tool (V2000 DCT)

The ASL V2000 Dynamic Configuration Tool (V2000 DCT) is used to commission V2000 Amplifier Frames
and INTEGRA Amplifier Frames.
The V2000 DCT is part of the PAVA System Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT) and is launched as described
below.

You will need:

A configuration PC installed with the PAVA SCT; see “APPENDIX B – Installing the PAVA System
Configuration Tool (PAVA SCT)” (page 181).

To launch the V2000 DCT:

1. Ensure the configuration PC has an Ethernet connection to the target unit; see “APPENDIX A – PC
Requirements” (page 176).
2. First launch the PAVA SCT by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen and then
selecting the following option.
All ProgramsASLPAVA System Configuration ToolPAVA SCT <version>System
Configuration Tool <version>

Or by double-click the application’s icon on the desktop .


3. Load the system configuration into the PAVA SCT.
a. Click on the icon on the toolbar.
Or select FileOpen from the menubar.
Or press Ctrl+O on the keyboard.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 206 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

b. A browser window will be opened. Navigate to system configuration file to be uploaded (*.xml).

c. Click the Open button.


4. Select the PC network interface used to connect to the PA/VA system.
a. Ensure that the required network interface is connected to the PA/VA system network.
b. Select PreferencesNetwork Connections from the menubar.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 207 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

c. Select the required network interface, and then click the Ok button.

Note that only active network interfaces are


displayed for selection.
If the required network interface is not displayed,
check the network connection between the PC
and the PA/VA system. Also ensure that the
target PA/VA units are powered on. Close and re-
load the Network Adapter selection dialog box.

5. Double-click the V2000 DCT application’s icon on the toolbar.


Or select the ToolsV2000 DCT menubar option:
Notes:
If no network interface has been selected or the selected interface is inactive, the Network Adapter
selection dialog box will be displayed as described above.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 208 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

6. The V2000 DCT is launched with the configuration PC network interface automatically set.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 209 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX L – Connecting to a VIPEDIA-12 Using Serial

You will need:

• A PC installed with a terminal emulation program (e.g. Tera Term available from
http://ttssh2.sourceforge.jp).
• A USB to RS232 converter.
• A cable to connect the PC to the VIPEDIA-12’s RS232 port; see Figure 62 below.

To connect to an INTEGRA Router using serial:

1. Ensure the target VIPEDIA-12 unit is powered on.


2. Connect the VIPEDIA-12’s RS232 port to a serial port of the PC; see Figure 62 below.

Figure 62 Connecting the configuration PC to the VIPEDIA-12's RS232 port

RJ45 Pin CAT5 Cable (EIA 568-B) Signal Description


1 white/orange – Not connected
2 orange RX RS232 Received Data
3 white/green TX RS232 Transmitted Data
4 blue DTR Data Terminal Ready

PC with 5 white/blue GND Common Ground


Terminal USB/RS232 6 green – Not connected
Emulation Converter 7 white/brown RTS Request To Send
Program 8 brown CTS Clear To Send
Relevant signals: RX, TX and GND

18-40V 2A CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN AUDIO INPUTS AUDIO OUTPUTS


1-6 DBB IN 1 ETH 1 RS232 1-4 5-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 1

1
A

- IN +
B
2

18-40V 2A 7 - 12 µSD CARD DBB OUT 1 ETH 2 AMP CTRL 9-12 CONTROL 7 8 9 10 11 12 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 2
CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN

3. Run the terminal emulation program (examples show Tera


Term) and select the serial port connected to the target
Router.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 210 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4. Select SetupSerial port….

5. Ensure the terminal emulator is set with:


− Baud rate: 115200
− Data: 8 bit
− Parity: none
− Stop: 1 bit
− Flow control: none
6. Click the OK button.

7. On the terminal window, press ENTER to obtain a “>”


prompt.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 211 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX M – Connecting to a Network Card Using Serial

You will need:

• A PC installed with a terminal emulation program (e.g. Tera Term available from
http://ttssh2.sourceforge.jp).
• A USB Type A to Micro-AB cable.

To connect to a Network Card using serial:

1. Ensure the target VIPEDIA-12 unit is powered on.


2. Connect the Network Card USB port to a USB port of the PC; see Figure 63 below.

Figure 63 Connecting the configuration PC to the Network Card USB port

PC with
Terminal
Emulation

18-40V 2A CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN AUDIO INPUTS AUDIO OUTPUTS


1-6 DBB IN 1 ETH 1 RS232 1-4 5-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 1

1
A

- IN +
B
2

18-40V 2A 7 - 12 µSD CARD DBB OUT 1 ETH 2 AMP CTRL 9-12 CONTROL 7 8 9 10 11 12 1-4 5-8 9-12 MIC AUX 2
CONTACTS OUT CONTACTS IN

3. Run the terminal emulation program (examples show Tera


Term) and select the serial port connected to the target
VIPEDIA-NET.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 212 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

4. Select SetupSerial port….

5. Ensure the terminal emulator is set with:


− Baud rate: 115200
− Data: 8 bit
− Parity: none
− Stop: 1 bit
− Flow control: none
6. Click the OK button.

7. On the terminal window, press ENTER to obtain a “#”


prompt.
Notes: VIPEDIA-NET hostname

a. If log in is required, user and password is available


from ASL or an appointed distributor.
b. If the Network Card is reset, the serial connection may
need to be remade.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 213 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX N – Connecting to a Network Card Using SSH

You will need:

• A PC installed with a terminal emulation program (e.g. Tera Term available from
http://ttssh2.sourceforge.jp).
• The IP address of the target Network Card.

To connect to a Network Card using SSH:

1. Ensure the configuration PC has an Ethernet connection to the target Network Card, for example, using
the “ping” command in a Command Prompt.
Refer to “Error! Reference source not found. Error! Reference source not found.” (page Error!
Bookmark not defined.) for further details.
2. Ensure the target INTEGRA unit is powered on.

3. Run the terminal emulation program (examples show


Tera Term).
4. Select FileNew Connection and select the options
shown on the example.
5. Enter the target Network Card in the Host field.
6. Click the OK button.

7. On the SSH Authentication window, enter:


• User name: root
• Passphrase: <access code>
The access code to the system is available from ASL or
appointed ASL distributor.
8. Select the Use plain password to log in.
9. Click the OK button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 214 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

10. A security warning will be displayed the first time the


configuration PC connects to the IP address.
11. Click the Continue button.

12. On the terminal window, ENTER the required command.

13. Select FileDisconnect once the task is complete.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 215 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX O – VIPEDIA-12 IP Address and Unit ID when


Unknown

VIPEDIA-12 Factory default IP and Unit ID configuration:

• IP Address: 192.168.1.10
• Gateway Address: 192.168.1.0
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
• Unit ID: 1

To view the IP address of a VIPEDIA-12:

Select the ConfigurationRouterIdentityIP ConfigIP Addr front panel menu option.

To view the Unit ID of a VIPEDIA-12:

Select the ConfigurationRouterIdentityUnit IdentityId front panel menu option.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 216 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX P – Finding the Network Card IP Address and


Hostname when Unknown

Network Card Factory default IP address and hostname:

• IP Address: 192.168.1.2
• Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
• Hostname: ffxav or vnet-default

You will need:

a) A configuration PC that meets the requirements defined in “APPENDIX A – PC Requirements”


(page 176).
b) A serial connection to the target Network Card; refer to “APPENDIX M – Connecting to a Network Card
Using Serial” (page 212) for instructions

To view the Network Card IP address and hostname of a Network Card:

1. Connect the Network Card USB port to a serial port of the PC as described in “APPENDIX M
– Connecting to a Network Card Using Serial” (page 212) for instructions.

Hostname
2. On the Network Card terminal emulator prompt,
press ENTER to obtain a “#” prompt.
The hostname is displayed in the command prompt.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 217 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

3. Enter the “ifconfig” command to show the unit IP


address.
The IP settings for all available network interfaces
will be displayed.
unm interface provides the unit IP address (“inet
addr”) and netmask information (“Mask”).

IP Address Netmask

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 218 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

APPENDIX Q – Resetting a VIPEDIA-12 or a Network Card


using the Firmware Transfer Tool (FTT)

In addition to firmware update function, the FTT provides a reset function that can be used to reboot
VIPEDIA-12/INTEGRA Routers and Network Cards as described below.

You will need:

A configuration PC installed with the Firmware Transfer Tool; see “APPENDIX C – Installing the Firmware
Transfer Tool (FTT)” (page 185).

To reboot a VIPEDIA-12 or Network Card:

1. Launch the Firmware Transfer Tool by clicking the Start button in the bottom-left corner of your screen
and then selecting the following option.
All ProgramsASLFirmware Transfer ToolFTT (<version>)Firmware Transfer Tool
(<version>)

Or by double-clicking the application’s icon on the desktop .


2. Select the PC network interface used to connect to the PA/VA system.
Ensure that the required network interface is connected to the PA/VA system network; see “APPENDIX
A – PC Requirements” (page 176).

3. Select the Firmware tab.


4. Enter the IP address of the target INTEGRA Router or Network card in the Device IP address field.
5. Select Router as Device Type.
6. Select the VIPEDIA-12 Router Id.
If rebooting an VIPEDIA-12, the Router Id is the unit ID of the VIPEDIA-12.
If rebooting a Network Card, the Router Id is the unit ID of the INTEGRA Router that contains the
Network Card.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 219 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

7. Click the Reset Router button.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 220 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 221 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 222 of 224
VIPEDIA-12 – User’s Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

U-0641-3283.docx – Issue: 01 complete, approved


Page 223 of 224

You might also like